1

2

National Symposium On India Striving Towoards One Step Ahead In Science&Technology in World

28th February, 2017

Edited by

Dr. Devendra Kumar Awasthi Dr. Gyanendra Awasthi Associate Professor and Head Associate Professor and Head, Department of Chemistry, Department of Biochemistry, J. N. P. G. College Lucknow (U.P) D.I.B.N.S, Dehradun (U.K.)

Jointly organized by Bharat Raksha Dal Trust Environmental Cell S.R. Institute of Management and Technology Association of Chemistry Teachers

2017 Ideal International E - Publication www.isca.co.in

3

427, Palhar Nagar, RAPTC, VIP-Road, Indore-452005 (MP) INDIA Phone: +91-731-2616100, Mobile: +91-80570-83382 E-mail: [email protected] , Website: www.isca.co.in

Title: Proceedings of National Symposium on India Striving towards one step ahead in science & technology in world Editor(s): Dr. Devendra Kumar Awasthi. Dr. Gyanendra Awasthi Edition: First Volume: I

© Copyright Reserved 2017

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored, in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, reordering or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher.

ISBN: 978-81-934005-8-6

4

CONVENER REPORT: DR.D.K.AWASTHI

On behalf of Organizing committee, I extend a warm welcome to distinguished guests, speakers, participants, research persons attending National Symposium on India Striving towards one step Ahead In Science & Technology In World on 28th February 2017organized by Bharat Raksha Dal Trust, SR Institute of Management &Technology Lucknow and Association Chemistry Teachers., Firstly I would like to thank, Our Honourable Chief Guest Dr.Ashiwin Dutt Pathak Director Sugar cane Research Institute Lucknow.It is one of the organizations of Indian Council of Agriculture Reasearch.Sri Pawan SinghChauhan Chairman SR Institute of Management &Technology Lucknow, honoured the chair as guest of honour for his persistent support & advice to customize and frame this event. Above all the support and guidance from Srinivasrai Founder & President. I think topic of the national symposium is more relevant. Today is the need to learn and execute scientifically the methodologies, program, plans and implementation for generation of energy and will have to think how to save for future. Dr. P. S. ojha has given lot of information for use of waist materialand generation of biogas energy.Dr Ojha is patron of national symposium.Many Scientists delivered their lecture like Dr.D.R.Malviya,Dr.Praveen Singh, Dr.D.K.Pandey,Dr.S.k.Srivastava,Dr.R.Kumar,Dr.Ranveer Singh.

Dr.D.K.AWASTHI (convener)

5

6

PAPER INDEX

S.No. Title Author Name 1. Situation And Future Of Science And Technology In India Dr.A.N.Dixit 2. Achievement Of Science And Technology Specially In Filariasis Dr.Shradha Sinha 3. India Is One Step Ahead For Development Of Space Programme In a Civilian Dr.Usha Rani Singh 4. TechnologicalDomain Innovation: A Prospective Source Of Economic growth Dr.Dilshad Ahmad Ansari

5. Application Of Mip - Sieve Sensor For Removal Of Mercury In Hospital Dr.Srinkhala Srivastava Wastes: A Tool Helping India Moving Ahead In Technology 6. Impact Of Environmental Pollution On Biodiversity Dr.Pallavi Dixit 7. Occupational Lifestyle Diseases In India Dr.Upasana yadav 8. Paint Industries And Its Effect On Common Man Dr. Richa Khare

9. Hydroponics - A Need Of The Time Dr.Renu Gupta 10. Role Of Phytoestrogens In The Treatment Of Various Estrogen Related Dr.Jaya Pandey 11. ImplementationDisorders Of Protection Of Plant Varieties & Farmers’ Rights Act, 2001 Dr. P.K. Singh 12. The Impact Of Science On Society Dr Jahan Ara 13. Role Of Hon’ble National Green Tribunal (Ngt) In Protection Of Environment Dr. Deepti Singh

14. Prediction Of Antagonistic Activity Of Β-Carboline And Its Derivatives Using Dr. Anil Kumar Soni Topological Descriptors 15. India’s Tryst With Technology: One Step Ahead Dr.Ruchi Srivastava 16. Plasma Spraying And Mathematical Modulation Dr. Mohammad Miyan

17. Maintenance Breeding For Quality Cane Seed Production In Sugarcane Dr.D.K. Pandey 18. Economic Growth Of Science And Technology In India Dr.Noohi Khan

19. Science & Technology In Ancient India Dr Monika Kamboj

20. Tapping Solar Energy :India Marching Ahead Dr.Sangeeta Verma

21 Advancing Science In India With Future Challenge Dr.Archana Maurya 22 Nanotechnology: One Of The Emerging Technologies In India Neha Jain 23 Innovation In Forage Research D R Malaviya

24 India As A Source Of Knowledge From Past To Present Dr Saurabh Kumar Singh 25 Role Of Carbon Dioxide In Drug Discovery Research Amit K. Chaturvedi 26 Recent , Trends In Controlling Vehicular Pollution Dr Richa Mehrotra

27. AUrban Solid Waste Management Need For Protection Of Human Health & The Dr. (Mrs.) Suman Lata Naturaldepartment Environment Of Applied In IndiaChemistry, Amity School Of Applied Sciences, Amity Verma University Uttar Pradesh (Auup), Lucknow Campus, Lucknow-226028, U. P. 28. LocalBdepartment Anaesthetics Of Chemistry, Drugs School Of Physical & Material Sciences, Mahatma D.K.Awasthi

29. GhandhiSynthesis Central and University,Antimicrobial Motihari activity-845401 of some (East Pyrozolidine Champaran), Derivatives Bihar, India S. S. Yadav Corresponding Author’s E-Mails: [email protected] ; [email protected]

7

Organic Trithiocarbonates Have Received Much Attention Due To

1

SITUATION AND FUTURE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

A.N.DIXIT, RETIRED PRINCIPAL, GOVERNMENT DEGREE COLLEGE, FARIDPUR, BAREILLY Abstract This paper reviews the science and technology policies of India and how these have fashioned India’s technology capability over the years. It shows that while India has achieved enormous strides in the area of science, technology and innovation, inappropriate policies in the past have hampered the development of an effective national innovation system. This paper charts the various phases of science, technology and innovation (STI) policies of India and their impact on the nation’s technology capability, and considers future policy prospects and development implications. With a population of over 1000 million, India is the world’s second largest country after China and the largest democracy. In terms of land area, it is the seventh biggest country in the world. With a GDP of about $430bn, India is the world’s eleventh richest nation but in purchasing power parity terms, it is fourth after, the US, China and Japan. The Indian economy has a strong element of duality. It is one of the most industrialised countries in the world, with remarkable achievements in indigenous technology, oceanography, deep-sea oil drilling, nuclear power, space and satellite communications and armaments manufacture. It is also a successful agricultural country. Three-quarters of the population owe their livelihoods to the sector, which coupled with fisheries and mining, account for about one-third of gross domestic product (GDP).

Introduction Implication of Science and Technology to mans' use is as old as 2500 B.C or much earlier when the people, of Indus Valley Civilization came to know first time about the fire and the wheel. Wheel is the mother of all technological innovations of today and discovery of fire is the man's first experience about energy.Since then, man's curiosity and meticulous efforts have helped him for new inventions and discoveries. But Science and Technology got its real recognition in India during the British period and were established to meet the needs and requirements of the then government. During 19th century, when the whole Europe passed through a phase of Industrial Revolution, the Britishers also put emphasis on development of Science and Technology in India.Establishment of railway system, building of canals and development of a network of meteorological stations began. The first scientific survey of this country was done during this time. Several academic institutions, such as Asiatic Society in Calcutta in 1784, the Indian Association for the Advancement of Science in 1876 and many others were created. All these generated a greater awareness of science in the country and eventually led to the birth of modern science in India between 1890 and 1940.However, the end of the last century and the first 50 years of the present one was a period of renaissance of science for India. Renowned scientists like Sir J. C. Bose, C. V. Raman, S. N. Bose, Srinivasa Ramanujan, Dr. Homi J. Bhabha, the father of India's nuclear power, Vikram Sarabhai, Dr. Har Govind Singh Khorana etc. became well-known for their notable scientific researches in various fields and brought name and fame for the country.During post independence period and through the vision of Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru the then Prime Minister,

8

Science and Technology were developed in a conscious way as a major force for accelerating social and economic change. Nehru clearly expressed his views in his 'Discovery of India’:"It was science alone that could solve the problems of hunger and poverty, of insanitation and illiteracy, of superstition and doddering custom and tradition, of vast resources running to waste, of a rich country inhabited by starving people,"Programme of 'Green Revolution' has made it true. Now, in the fields of space research, atomic energy, biotechnology and agriculture, India has achieved a lot. Continuous emergence of new areas and micro areas are gradually gaining the importance and specialized research areas like Superconductivity, Laser, Supercomputers, Robots and Robotics, Information Technology, Optic fibers etc. have resulted in a vast expansion in the areas/fields of SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY activities.India is still lagging behind in the field of energy; specifically harnessing clean, safe and non-polluting energy through exaltation of non-conventional resources. Solar energy, the limitless source (the sun) provided by the nature, is still underutilized. Though much is achieved, but more is left unattended.Hence, with the consistent support of the government as well as private institutions today there are about 3000 public and private institutions engaged in basic/fundamental, applied researches and development works in various fields of science and technology .Science as a method of acquiring knowledge, its systemization, interpretation and drawing conclusions helps man to widen the horizons of understanding. This knowledge helps him to develop his social, economic and cultural life. Every civilization that has developed economically and socially has attributed its success to Science and technology. India is proud to have one of the oldest civilizations in the world, with one sixth of world population and one third of scientic and technological manpower. In spite of being culturally and socially- rich, India is not very "rich" in the true sense of the word. For economy to progress, and life- style to improve, scientic development in India is imminent. So to shape the future with scientic ideas, clear understanding of the present is essential. Behind the present lay the long and tangled past out of which the present has grown. Tracing back the chain of scientic achievements in the past would give hints for futuristic developments. I was just wondering how much past should I have to look back, for ancient India's scientic achievements date back from time immemorial. In this essay I have attempted to sketch the scientic developments in India in various points of time.Indian pre-history began with the vast Harappan or the Greater Indus Valley civilization which represented a cultural continuum extending from 7000 to 1400 B.C. The excavations done at Harappa and Mohenja-daro (now in Pakistan), in 1930's by John Marshall of England, put the age of India's oldest civilization as more than 3000 B.C. It is interesting to note that at this dawn of India's history, she does not appear as a puling infant, but already grown up in many ways. She is not oblivious of life's ways but has made considerable technical progress in the arts and amenities of life. The Indus valley people not only created things of beauty but also the utilitarian and more typical emblems of modern civilizations. The high point of this civilization was the mature urban Harappan phase (2500-2000 B.C) characterized by well-planned cities, extensive external trade, manufacture of artistic seals, development of Harappan script.[1, 2] etc., Later came the Vedic period. There is reportedly clear evidence of the positions of some stars at the time of the earliest Vedas which, calculating for the precession of the equinoxes, dates as early as 8,000 B.C.[3] The period of Indus valley civilizations is a matter of controversy and whether Vedic period precedes or follows it adds new dimension to the issue. Therefore I am not going to dwell on the period of the two cultures, instead [2] is referred to know more about Vedic and puranic science. The cultural, religious, social, literary, and political life of the people of Vedic period is well documented in four Vedas which are Rig,

9

Yajur, Sama and Atharvana. The rishis or saints have tried to answer many of the mysteries of the world through their intuition and experience. Rig veda is the oldest book whose main contents are composed in 4500 B.C. The oldest Greek classics Iliad and Odyssey of Homer were written about four to five hundred years later.[4] Rig veda was a compilation of 1028 hymns composed by a large number of authors over many generations.India's whole culture had been fashioned by geography. Lofty mountains in the north and the oceans on the other three sides made India into nature's protectorate It has maintained an unbroken cultural tradition and reinforces it by periodic intellectual inputs from other cultural areas. The unique combination of antiquity, continuity and unselfconscious interaction with the outside world was/is India's hallmark. India could not have continued a cultured existence for thousands of years, if she has not possessed something very vital, enduring and something that was worthwhile. The search for the sources of India's strength and for her deteriotion is long and intricate. She fell behind in the march of technique, and Europe which had been backward in many matters took the lead in technical progress. Behind the technical progress was the spirit of science and a bubbling life. New techniques gave military strength to the countries of Europe and it was easy for them to spread out and dominate the East.

Indian science at present In the nineteenth century there was widespread use of science by the British to further their commercial and political interests. Indians came into contact with modern science, when they were assigned the peripheral role of providing cheap labour. Once introduced to modern science, Indians finally strove to become full-edged members of the international republic of science in their own right. During 1950s in the advanced countries "Big Science" activities, which grew from the industrial and technological base established by the World War II, took great leaps forward. The peoples of India and other less developed countries, on the other hand were involved during 1950s with restructuring their societies after 200 years of colonial rule. And as India had not been involved in wartime science, it had no infrastructure to build science and technology systems. As a result, India fell behind in the race for big science. The first Prime Minister of Independent India, Jawaharlal Nehru had a vision of science as an integral tool in the task of development. His views had two merits, the first was having a humane and peaceful world-view as its fundamental premise, and the second its strong link to secular and rational thought. He had the viewpoint that the investment in advanced science and technology was an investment for the future, an attempt to keep up with the knowledge explosion of the twentieth century, even as the basic tasks of development were attended to. The Council of Scientic and Industrial Research (CSIR) was established in 1942, and today it is networking 39 laboratories and more than 100 universities and field centres. The Council's research programmes are directed towards the effective utilization of the country's natural resources and development of new processes and products for economic progress. The nation-wide Science and Technology (S & T) infrastructure has grown from Rs.10 million at the time of independence (in the year 1947) to Rs.30 billion, slightly more than 1% of GNP. Now India has the third largest number of scientists and technologists in the world. There has been a signicant growth in India's capability and accomplishments in several high technology areas such as nuclear, space, S&T, electronics and defence research and development. The Government is committed to make S&T an integral part of the socio- economic development of the country. Among the developing fields, Atomic Energy is leading. India's power requirement will be provided by eight nuclear power reactors with a total of 1400 MW

10

generation capacity. The scientists and the Government now try to obtain 20,000 MW of electricity in 2020 from atomic energy alone. As the power is essential for industry and in turn, for economy to flourish a time-bound, result-oriented approach is followed. After independence from the British, self- reliance in food production was the major achievement. Most of the countries in the world think that India is a poor country, unable to feed its people. But it has to be noted that for the past five years the food grains such as rice, wheat and other pulses are produced in surplus amount. This was made possible by the supreme research done in the field of agriculture. The project was titled 'Green Revolution' in the 1970's and led by an efficient scientist Dr.M.S. Swaminathan. Bio-scientists and different government agencies are successful in producing high yielding, disease-resistant hybrid crops. This was the main reason for the success of Green Revolution. Along with the Green Revolution, the White Revolution (for diary products) was initiated. Now scientists are trying to attain the achievement made by Green Revolution in White Revolution too. The Indian space programme has made signicant strides towards establishing operational systems for national development. The Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO), under the Department of Space is responsible for research, development and operationlisation of space systems in the areas of satellite communications, remote sensing for resource survey and management, environmental monitoring, meteorological services etc., India is the only developing country to develop its own remote sensing satellite. ISRO reached its landmark, by launching the first Geo-Stationary Launch Vehicle (GSLV) in July, 2001. Even though Indian space research is inflicted by fund reductions and economic sanctions by the developed countries, it continues to make strides. As the Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) and GSLV soar high in the blue-sky, so do the selfcon dence of the people and the pride of the Indian scientists. The development made by India in defence research is remarkable. India is able to produce indegeniosly many of the state-of-the art missiles and other armory. In the field of telecommunication and Information Technology India made amazing progress. From only 6 Radio stations and only one TV transmitter in 1947, to more than 200 radio stations and more than 1000 TV transmitters now, is a remarkable progress indeed. With the help of satellites almost all Indian villages are inter connected with telephones, radios and television networks. A multi-pronged approach has been evolved for result-oriented research and development with special emphasis on micro-electronics, telematics, high performance computing and software development. Though Bio-technology and Oceanography are not well-developed earlier, they are now paid due attention with the establishment of separate government organizations for these during 1980's. There is some criticism in the scientific community that the Government over-spends for defence research. According to the R & D budget, of the year 1988-89, Defence research bagged about 27% of total money allocated for research. while agriculture and alternate energy which are the higher priorities for common man only received 9 and 17% respectively. The political and geographical factors that make government to spend more for defence research is in some way justified because the national security should be preserved at any cost. Though the wisdom of the government and scientists involved in the testing of atom bomb in 1997 was questioned and is a matter of controversy (which will not be elaborated here) it has to be emphasized that the Indian science and technology has an upbeat attitude that economic sanctions could be weathered without much damage. The private sector, which have contributed almost nothing to S&T research in India and preferred foreign collaborations, now expressed their full support for indigenous development of technologies. This is the blessing in disguise for research and development for India. This has been emphasized by the fact that the technological

11

milestones such as Light Combat Aircraft (LCA) and GSLV were delayed by the economic sanctions but were never stopped. India is excelling in medicinal research also. Many of the diseases like polio, tuberculosis, small pox etc., are completely eradicated. Owing to the low-cost and higher effi ciency of the surgeons and physicians, many people in countries like Unite Kingdom and Germany now like to go to India to get medical treatment. However, it has to be acknowledged that it is an uphill task to provide the health-care to all people in India. India being a democratic and secular country can not impose strict population control measures as some communist countries do. But there is some good news too, that some of the developed-states in India show stabilization and even declining of population growth.While it is the private sector that constitutes the engine of innovation, national policies create environments that can encourage or constrain the ability of firms to innovate. The more innovative firms are, the more they are profitable and the more value-added they create in a nation. It is, therefore, vital for countries to put in place policies to create an effective and efficient national innovation system (NIS). Four conditions need to be met for building an effective national innovation system. These are a) strong and competitive pressures on domestic firms; b) the presence of high quality human capital; c) welldeveloped links between industry, institutions and academia; and d) openness and access to foreign technologies. These determinants of an NIS indicate that innovation involves far more than science and technology. It cannot be denied, however, that a forward-looking S&T policy can be developed to foster an appropriate mix of these determinants. Indeed, the first step towards, and the necessary pre- requisite to, any good NIS is an effective S&T policy. In recognition of this, all advanced and industrialising countries consciously foster an S&T policy. The pressures of international competition have made both knowledge creation and exploitation vital for business success. As a result, the internationalisation of R&D has increasing relevance for strategic management of companies and the strengthening of national innovation systems. The globalisation of R&D is establishing deep roots for several reasons. Firstly, changing geopolitical infrastructures are creating new opportunities for synergistic R&D activities across national frontiers. Secondly, rapidly changing technologies are no longer constrained by geographical boundaries. Thirdly, increasing complexities of technological systems are making it imperative to generate and implement knowledge in emerging fields quickly and collaboratively. Fourthly, the need for brainpower with an ever-increasing sophistication is being met by identifying and employing people with the appropriate skills at appropriate locations wherever they may be. International R&D strategy is thus emerging to meet these challenges. To this end, firms in developed countries and increasingly in some developing countries are being driven to take advantage of world-wide science and technology resources. These factors have spurred the growth of science and technology developments in those nations, which have conducive environments. Israel, Taiwan, Singapore, South Korea and, to a lesser extent, Ireland, have made substantial progress in upgrading their innovative capacity and, as a result, have become beneficiaries of foreign investments in science and technology ventures. Although countries such as India, China and Malaysia, have increased investments in areas related to science, technology and innovation at modest levels, there is little doubt that some of these, especially China and India, are potential scientific powerhouses. Indian science in the future The most serious challenge facing India's S&T establishments is that of human resources. Several committees have advised the government even 20 years ago that, the capacity of generating and sustaining technological growth had to be strengthened considerably. Because, the number of people available for such enterprises is very small in relation to the country's

12

high rate of population growth and corresponding social needs. The quality of new entrants will obviously determine the quality of the organization in the future. More and more talented youngsters opt for software industry, and less people wish to take up higher education in sciences. Hence the research institutions face ma jor crunch of qualified personnel. There are voices of concern saying that Indian science today heavily skewed toward nuclear, military and space research. In spite of having third largest stock of scientific and technological personnel in the world, India's S&T had little effect on the daily life of Indians. One of the ma jor difficulties facing is the starvation of research funds for universities and institutions of higher learning. The result is that the quality of higher education is also affected. India spends around 1% of its annual GNP for R&D. Though it is not adequate for a country that plans to develop as a knowledge society and achieve high rates of growth based on scientific and technological achievements. However, it does indicate a sizable commitment to S&T. It has to be acknowledged that even in developed nations there is growing concern that funding allocated for R&D is not sufficient. The Green revolution ensured that scientific innovation spread directly from lab to land. As the traditional ownership of farming assets are with the farmers themselves, it was easier for them to accept and employ technological innovation. In contrast, due to some policies of the government, it was far easier for industrialists to purchase technology from overseas than to develop their own. Therefore the culture of interaction between the industry and the research institutions as prevalent in developed countries is almost totally absent in India. However, the pharmaceutical and drug industry are now developing their own R&D facilities. Like in US, the mission based approach has led to much success in the sectors like space and atomic energy. The same method has to be adopted for industrial research in order to promote it further. According to Jacob Bronowski[16] "the activity of science is directed to seek the truth and it is judged by the criterion of being true to facts. We can practice science only if we value the truth". It is important to have the critical and rational spirit in society for science to flourish. It bears emphasis that science and scientists fulfill their social responsibility [17] in assisting in the task of expanding the realm of operation of free and critical enquiry in society. Article 51-A(h) of the Indian Constitution states that "it shal l be the duty of every citizen of India...to develop the scientific temper, humanism and the spirit of inquiry and reform".[18] However, the main challenge facing the scientific community is to make the people have a scientific temper while they enjoy the fruits of science. There is wide spread obscruantism and absence of radical thinking even among the educated lot. Therefore it is the duty of every scientist to propagate a scientific temper, and to popularize science. It is important to get out of traditional ways of thinking and living. Even though they were good in the past, have less significance today. There is no visible limit to the advance of science, if it is given the chance to advance. The applications of science are inevitable and unavoidable for all countries and peoples today. But something more that mere application is necessary. It is the scientific approach, the adventurous yet critical temper of science, the search for truth and new knowledge, the refusal to accept anything without testing, the capacity to change previous conclusions in the face of new evidence, the reliance on observed fact and not on pre-conceived theory, the hard discipline of the mind- all this is necessary not merely the application of science but for life itself and the solution of its many problems. Science has dominated the Western world and everyone pays tribute to it. India has a greater distance to travel and yet there may be fewer ma jor obstacles on the way, for the essential basis of Indian thought fits in with the scientific temper and approach. It is based on a fearless search for truth, on the solidarity of man, on the free and cooperative development of the individual and the species, ever to greater freedom and

13

higher stages of human growth. I hope that the Present Prime Minister Mr. Va jpayee's slogan "Victory to the soldier, Victory to the farmer and Victory to Science (Jai Jawan, Jai Kisanand Jai Vigyan") will lead India to development in all spheres of life.

The Initial Growth Phase The genesis of India's industrial policies was the Industrial Policy Resolution (IPR), the work for which was started in 1948 and passed in 1958. Under this policy, India pursued a policy of import-substitution and placed emphasis on basic and heavy industries. A faster growth rate in the productive capacity of capital goods industries was seen as vital to raising savings and investment rates, diversifying the industrial sector and promoting manufactured exports. Given the negligible R&D base at this time, flows of foreign technologies were required and indeed encouraged. FDI, technology licensing and financial and technical collaborations were allowed over a wide range of industries. In this liberal atmosphere, industrial boom in India started to take off in the late 1950s. The policy of import-substitution created and sustained demand for foreign technologies. Foreign collaborations increased six-fold between 1948/55 and 1964/70. The FDI stock more than doubled to Rs5660 million between 1948 and 1964. Technology-related royalty payments jumped sixteen-fold between 1956/7 and 1967/8. As noted by Desai (1980), the building of industrial capacity proceeded almost totally on the basis of imported technology, and, in the absence of any need to improve competitiveness, there was little or no incentive to learn, absorb, assimilate and upgrade foreign technologies to create capabilities. While industrialisation proceeded on back of foreign technologies, "R&D promotion policies focused on creating a scientific and research base" (Aggarwal 2001). The IPR (1958) considered the creation of a scientific base as a pre-requisite for developing the domestic R&D base on the premise that “technology grows out of the study of science and its application" (Aggarwal 2001). This stance led to substantial investments in the establishment of science-based educational and R&D infrastructure. The number of engineering colleges and seats rose from 38 and 2940 in 1947 to 138 and 25000 respectively in 1970. In 1968, the Indian Institutes of Technology, modelled on the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, were set up. There was also a rapid expansion of agencies like the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR), the Department of Atomic Energy and the Defence Research and Development Organisation. Such R&D as was performed at this time was centred on: a) scaling down of plants based on foreign technology to suit Indian markets b) adapting foreign processes to Indian conditions and local materials and, c) Tackling on-the-spot production problems and quality control. As Desai (1980) has put it, this was a period when the emphasis was on R&D with a short pay-off, although it must be said that over the period India built a substantial scientific base and R&D capability. Commercial Orientation of Public Research Organisations India has a strong industrial research infrastructure, which was fostered in the early stages of its post- independence growth. While the supply-side was generously supported, the industrial research system, prior to liberalisation, was mostly geared to import substitution (Bowonder and Richardson, 2000). The publicly funded Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) and other bodies tended to be isolated entities with little or no links to industry. In such a protected environment, there was no need to benchmark their activities to those of global players. Also their activities were only marginally focused on commercialisation. The last decade has seen many of these laboratories become more commercially

14

oriented. They have been directing their efforts towards international quality R&D. Two recent major policy thrusts have been (a) an increase in the quest for patenting in Europe and the USA, as a means of engendering a strong desire to undertake R&D and to innovate and (b) an increase in the commercial orientation of industrial research, with a view to making these bodies less dependent on public budgetary support.

Industrial Clusters The agglomeration, scale and scope economies that are reaped in Silicon Valley are well known. In pre- liberalised India, the government explicitly tried to promote balanced industrial development by providing incentives for companies to set up in “backward” areas. In pursuit of this goal, public sector units were set up in locations that sometimes created strong locational disadvantages for their future development as well as for efficiency. A departure from this policy, especially by some entrepreneurially minded state governors (Chief Ministers) and a conscious encouragement of industrial clusters in recent years, have created enormous benefits to firms and local economies. Bangalore, dubbed the Silicon Valley of India, is clearly the base of a high technology cluster. Thirteen of the twenty-three companies in the world rated at level 5 on the Software Engineering Institute’s Capability Maturity Model (CMM) are located in Bangalore (Krishnan, 2001). About 35% of the risk capital invested in India between 1998 and 2001 is estimated to have been invested in Bangalore. In view of Bangalore’s success, other states such as Masharastra and Andra Pradesh are encouraging other high technology and biotechnology clusters.

Science and Technology Policy in Relation to the Multilateral System India is a founder member of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) 1947 and its successor, the World Trade Organisation (WTO), which came into effect on January 1 1995, after the conclusion of the Uruguay Round of multilateral trade negotiations. India's participation is based on the need to ensure more stability and predictability in international trade with a view to achieving more trade and prosperity for itself and the other members of the WTO. The multilateral trading system administered by the WTO aims to bring about orderliness, transparency and predictability in global trade through reductions in tariffs, progressive removal of non-tariff barriers, elimination of trade- distorting measures and systems of values to serve as guidelines for national legislation to bring about uniformity in laws and regulations everywhere. The establishment of the WTO has created a forum for continuous negotiations to reconcile differing and oftentimes conflicting interests of members. Although there is unanimity in the provisions of International Trade theory that free trade enhances global welfare, nationalism and differing goals as well as the appropriation of the benefits of trade lead to many disagreements and conflicts within the global trading system. Conflicts arise between developed and developing countries (as a result of differing New Science, Technology and Innovation Developments In India developmental needs and goals) and even between developed or developing country blocs. India strongly subscribes to the multilateral approach to trade relations and grants MFN treatment to all its trading partners, including even those, which are non-members of the WTO. Within the WTO, India has committed itself to ensuring that the sectors in which developing countries hold a comparative advantage are adequately opened up to international trade and also that the special Differential Treatment Provisions for developing countries under various WTO Agreements are

15

translated into specific enforceable dispensations in order that developing countries are facilitated in their developmental efforts. In line with the stance of many developing countries, India feels very strongly that the multilateral system should reflect the concerns of developing countries. India supports its arguments with basic principles. The Uruguay Round negotiators stated their intentions clearly in the Preamble to the Marrakech Agreement establishing the WTO. They recognised that "their relations in the field of trade and economic endeavour should be conducted with a view to raising standards of living and ensuring full employment and a large and steadily growing volume of real income”. They also recognised "that there is need for positive efforts designed to ensure that developing countries, and especially the least developed among them, secure a share in the growth in international trade commensurate with the needs of their economic development." As India sees it, globalisation has caused uneven growth, increasing the disparities between the richest and poorest nations. There is need to address the implementation of existing agreements and operationalising the special and differential clauses in favour of developing countries.

Conclusion For science and technology to attain its peak in a society, favorable political, cultural, social and religious scenarios are essential. India remains a interesting case-study for this concept. When men were free to think and work they were able to excel in many exciting frontiers of science. But when the social and political milieu of scientist and thinkers deteriote so do the science. This is the main reason why there was not much scientific breakthroughs in the last 1000 years. After India became free from the clutches of foreign rulers, the sociological clutches are also released slowly. So India is making strides to become self-reliant in every field of science. However ma jor revamps are needed to make scientific development as a vector of social development. Before concluding I would like to quote Jawaharlal Nehru, the first Prime Minister of Independent India- "We are citizens of no mean country and we are proud of the land of our birth, of our people, our culture and tradition. That pride should not be for a romantized past to which we want to cling. We have a long way to go and we must hurry, for the time at our disposal is limited and the pace of the world grows ever swifter".

References [1] O.P. Jaggi, Dawn of Indian Technology, Atma Ram and Sons, Delhi, 1969. [2] O.P. Jaggi, Dawn of Indian Science, Atma Ram and Sons, Delhi, 1969. [3] David Frawley, Gods, Sages and Kings - Vedic Secrets of ancient civilization, Motilal Banardas, Delhi, 1993. [4] Wazir Hasan Abdi, Glimpses of Mathematics in Medieval India, History of Indian Science, Technology and Culture, Vol III, part I Oxford University Press, New Delhi, page 51.

16

O2

ACHIEVEMENT OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY ESPECIALLY IN FILARIASIS SHRADHA SINHA AND SHAILJA PANDEY DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY BABU BANARASI DAS NORTHERN INDIA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

In every day life, we enjoy various gifts of science and technology that made our life more easy and comfortable than before. Science and Technology is the basis of modern civilization. The age in which we live can rightly be called the age of science and technology. The progress of science and technology has made many useful achievements in every field of life. India has made a strong focus on science and technology because it is the key element of economic growth. India positioned as one of the top five nations in the field of space exploration. The country has regularly undertaken space missions, including missions to the moon and the famed polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV). Some of important developments in the field of science and technology in India are as follows: a) India is among the world’s top 10 nations in the number of scientific publications. b) The Indian Institute of Science (IISC), Bangalore has become the first Indian Institution to enter the top 100 universities ranking in engineering and technology. c) The Indian Institute of Science has discovered a breed of natural cures for cancer in quercetin, which is found in fruits and leaves of Vernonia condensata. It can significantly reduce the tumor size and increase the longevity of life. d) Indian regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS- IG), the seventh and final navigation satellite was developed by ISRO, which will reduce the country’s dependency on US Global Positioning System. e) India is aggressively working towards establishing itself as a leader in industrialization and technological development. f) The agriculture sector is also likely to undergo a major revamp, with the government investing heavily for the technology driven Green Revolution. India has consistently progressed in the fields of physics, maths, chemistry, medicine and space studies despite of not having high level equipment and wealth. Scientific research done in India by our own citizens have changed the way the world works from healing and eradicating deadly diseases. Filariasis is one disease which is a leading cause of permanent disability. India is endemic for filariasis since time immemorial and presently the largest number of peoples both “at risk” and infected, live in India. India description of the disease dates back to 6th century B.C. and the discovery of microfilariae (embryonic stage of worm) in the peripheral blood by ewis, in 1872, in Calcutta lead the Indian Scientists to carry out extensive research works and brought out real situation of prevalence of both the form of filarisis in India since 6th century B.C. . The current estimate reveals that more than a billion (1.1) people living in 73 countries are exposed to the risk of infection. There are an estimated 120 million people infected, of which 76 million are apparently normal but have hidden internal damage to lymphatic and renal systems and 44 million are diseased. The most widespread human lymphatic filarial infection is

17

caused by W. bancrofti and commonly termed as Bancroftian filariasis. India has carried out outstanding research work in filariasis control, which forms the basis for current elimination strategy. The contributions made by the Indian scientists and particularly the Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) in bringing both the current understanding of filariasis disease.

New initiatives for the Present and Future : a) Molecular and immune-diagnostics tests developed elsewhere have been field evaluated by the VCRC. Both DNA probes and ICT test and OG4C3 tests for W. bancrofti have been field evaluated in India. b) The ICMR and other centres (CMC, Vellore) have been involved in the development of Rapid Assessment Procedures (RAP). This is currently being extended to develop methods and Rapid Epidimiological Mapping for Filariasis (REMFIL) with WHO/TDR support. c) School based intervention for control of filariasis and intestinal worms . d) Optimal use of Annual single dose DEC or Invermectin. e) Community based seasonal vector control. f) Uses of personal protection measures to prevent infection from the very conceptual stages to its validation and further refinement for operational application. g) Morbidity control in terms of foot hygience for filarial patients (in areas where disease rates, particularly lymphoedema is high). h) Albendazole in combination withDEC on lymphatic filariasis elimination. i) Epidemiological mapping and Stratification using GIS and remote sensing. j) Epidemiological Studies – Exposure Heterogeneity. k) Operation Research – Advocacy, Drug Delivery Strategies. l) Filariasis can be eliminated with the existing tools, using appropriate technology with the active involvement of the community.

03

INDIA IS ONE STEP AHEAD FOR DEVELOPMENT OF SPACE PROGRAMME IN A CIVILIAN DOMAIN

USHA RANI SINGH, ASSISTANT PROFESSOR DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, MAHILA VIDYALAYA P. G. COLLEGE LUCKNOW

Abstract: The Indian space programme has been one of the most successful and cost-effective endeavors, especially, when one looks at the wide range of benefits that have accrued to the nation and society. As India enters the new millennium, it is necessary to sustain this programme by continuously tuning it to the fast changing requirements and updating the technology that goes into the making of these sophisticated systems. Over the last four decades, Indian Space program has made remarkable progress

18

towards building the space infrastructure as the community resource to accelerate various developmental processes and harness the benefits of space applications for socio-economic development. India today is among the six major groups in space missions. The others are the United States, Russia, the European Space Agency, China and Japan. In terms of applications, India is considered a role model for the world. Uniqueness of the Indian space programme is that it is able to use the space based platforms for implementing various applications programs which touches the day-to-day life of the common man. The synoptic view of planet earth in high resolution multi spectral images has opened up new avenues for assessing natural resources, and are extensively used for management of natural resources like land water, forest, fisheries etc. Also these images help in weather prediction, climate change studies and assessment of damages due to floods earthquake and tsunami. The Indian Space programme has the primary objective of developing space technology and application programmes to meet the developmental needs of the country. Towards meeting this objective, two major operational systems have been established – the Indian National Satellite (INSAT) for telecommunication, television broadcasting, and meteorological services and the Indian Remote Sensing Satellite (IRS) for monitoring and management of natural resources and Disaster Management Support, such as agriculture, land and water resources, forestry, environment, natural disasters, urban planning and infrastructure development, rural development, and forecasting of potential fishing zones. ISRO has designed and developed indigenous systems for ground based observations of weather parameters. It includes (a) Automatic Weather Station (AWS) to providing hourly information on critical weather parameters such as pressure, temperature, humidity, rainfall, wind and radiation from remote and inaccessible areas; (b) Agro Metrological (AGROMET) Towers to measure soil temperature, soil moisture, soil heat and net radiation, wind speed, wind direction, pressure and humidity; (c) Flux Tower for multi- level micrometeorological observation as well as subsurface observations on soil temperature and moisture over the vegetative surfaces;(d) Doppler Weather Radar (DWR) to monitor severe weather events such as cyclone and heavy rainfall; (e) GPS Sonde and Boundary Layer LIDAR (BLL) for observing vertical profiles of atmospheric parameters.

By mapping of cultivated areas and monitoring crop growth helps in providing early warning of pest attack, and drought condition. These warnings help farmers in taking corrective actions and in fertilizer movements and data for crop insurers. Agriculture plays an important role in economies of countries. The production of food is important to everyone and producing food in a cost-effective manner is the goal of every farmer and an agricultural agency. The satellites have ability to image individual fields, regions and counties on a frequent revisit cycle. Customers can receive field-based information including crop identification, crop area determination and crop condition monitoring. Satellite data are employed in precision agriculture to manage and monitor farming practices at different levels. The data can be used to farm optimization and spatially-enable management of technical operations. The images can help determine the location and extent of crop stress and then can be used to develop and implement a spot treatment plan that optimizes the use of agricultural chemicals. The major agricultural applications of remote sensing include the following:

19

Crop type classification Remote sensing technology can be used to prepare maps of crop type and delineating their extent. Traditional methods of obtaining this information are census and ground surveying. The use of satellites is advantageous as it can generate a systematic and repetitive coverage of a large area and provide information about the health of the vegetation. The data of crop is needed for agricultural agencies to prepare an inventory of what was grown in certain areas and when. This information serves to predict grain crop yield, collecting crop production statistics, facilitating crop rotation records, mapping soil productivity, identification of factors influencing crop stress, assessment of crop damage and monitoring farming activity. There are several types of remote sensing systems used in agriculture but the most common is a passive system that senses the electromagnetic energy reflected from plants. The spectral reflection of a vegetation depend on stage type, changes in the phenology (growth), and crop health, and thus can be measured and monitored by multi-spectral sensors. Many remote sensing sensors operate in the green, red, and near infrared regions of the EM spectrum, they measure both absorption and reflectance effects associated with vegetation. Multi-spectral variations facilitate fairly precise detection, identification and monitoring of vegetation. The observation of vegetation phenology requires multi-temporal images (data at frequent intervals throughout the growing season). Different sensors (multi-sensor) often provide complementary information, and when integrated together, can facilitate interpretation and classification of imagery. Examples include combining high resolution panchromatic imagery with coarse resolution multi-spectral imagery, or merging actively and passively sensed data (SAR imagery with multi-spectral imagery).

.Crop monitoring and damage assessment Remote sensing has a number of attributes that lend themselves to monitoring the health of crops. The optical (VIR) sensing adventage is that it can see the infrared, where wavelengths are highly sensitive to crop vigour as well as crop stress and crop damage. Remote sensing imagery also gives the required spatial overview of the land. Remote sensing can aid in identifying crops affected by conditions that are too dry or wet, affected by insect, weed or fungal infestations or weather related damage Images can be obtained throughout the growing season to not only detect problems, but also to monitor the success of the treatment. Detecting damage and monitoring crop health requires high-resolution, multi- spectral imagery and multi-temporal imaging capabilities. One of the most critical factors in making imagery useful to farmers is a quick turnaround time from data acquisition to distribution of crop information.

Soil mapping The disturbance of soil by land use impacts on the quality of our environment. Salinity, soil acidification and erosion are some of the problems. Remote sensing is a good method for mapping and prediction of soil degradation. Soil layers that rise to the surface during erosion have different color, tone and structure than non eroded soils thus the eroded parts of soil can be easily identify on the images Using multi-temporal images we can study and map dynamical features - the expansion of erosion, soil moisture. Attempts to study land degradation processes and the necessity of degradation prediction have resulted in the creation of erosion models. The necessary information parameters of the models;

20

Universal Soil Loss Equation (USLE) to modeling can be often derived from satellite images. The vegetative cover is a major factor of soil erosion.Forest coverage is an important asset for the nation. Periodic monitoring provides an opportunity to detect damages caused to environment. One of the basic applications is forest cover typing and species identification. Forest cover typing can consist of reconnaissance mapping over a large area, while species inventories are highly detailed measurements of stand contents and characteristics (tree type, height, density). Using remote sensing data we can identify and delineate various forest types, that would be difficult and time consuming using traditional ground surveys. Data is available at various scales and resolutions to satisfy local or regional demands. Requirements for reconnaissance mapping depend on the scale of study. For mapping differences in forest cover (canopy texture, leaf density,) are needed:

a) Multi-spectral images, a very high resolution data is required to get detailed species identification b) Multi-temporal images datasets contribute phenology information of seasonal changes of different species c) Stereo photos help in the delineation and assessment of density, tree height and species d) Hyper-spectral imagery can be used to generate signatures of vegetation species and certain stresses (e.g. infestations) on trees. Hyper-spectral data offers a unique view of the forest cover, available only through remote sensing technology e) RADAR is more useful for applications in the humid tropics because it’s all weather imaging capability is valuable for monitoring forest f) LiDAR data allows the 3-dimensional structure of the forest. The multiple return systems are capable of detecting the elevation of land and objects on it. The LIDAR data help estimate a tree height, a crown area and number of trees per unit area.

Clear cut mapping and deforestation One of an important global problem is deforestation. There are many implications of it: in industrialized parts of world, pollution (acid rain, soot and chemicals from factory smoke plumes) has damaged a large percentage of forested land, in tropical countries, valuable rainforest is being destroyed in an effort to clear potentially valuable agricultural and pasture land. The loss of forests increases soil erosion, river siltation and deposition, affecting the environment.

Land cover mapping It is one of the most important and typical applications of remote sensing data. Land cover corresponds to the physical condition of the ground surface, for example, forest, grassland, concrete pavement etc., while land use reflects human activities such as the use of the land, for example, industrial zones, residential zones, agricultural fields etc Initially the land cover classification system should be established, which is usually defined as levels and classes. The level and class should be designed in consideration of the purpose of use (national, regional or local), the spatial and spectral resolution of the remote sensing data, user's request and so on.

21

Land cover Detection is necessary for updating land cover maps and the management of natural resources. The change is usually detected by comparison between two multi-date images, or sometimes between an old map and an updated remote sensing image.

Seasonal change Agricultural lands and deciduous forests change seasonally.

Annual change: Land cover or land use changes, which are real changes, for example deforested areas or newly built towns. Information on land cover and changing land cover patterns is directly useful for determining and implementing environment policy and can be used with other data to make complex assessments (e.g. mapping erosion risks). A few years ago, Indian fishermen identified potential fishing zones using conventional methods - by the congregation of birds, the colour of the water, bubbles on the sea surface, and even smell. They had to travel long distances without success. ISRO has changed all this. Satellites now sense the surface temperature and colour of ocean water. The data is processed and analyzed at the Indian National Centre for Ocean Information Services in Hyderabad. Such data is communicated to fishing villages through satellites, With this input fishermen couled directly sail to such region directly. The yield per catch quite often is more than double and there is considerable saving in time and fuel. The savings are an estimated Rs 1 lakh to Rs 6 lakh a year per fishing vessel. ISRO is set to play an important role in two other areas - climate change studies and microwave remote sensing. A normal remote sensing satellite takes pictures from orbit, 600 km above the Earth's surface, but its sensors cannot see through cloud cover. Microwave remote sensing can penetrate clouds and give useful information during heavy rains and floods. Earlier, such data came from a Canadian satellite, but in April this year, ISRO launched RISAT- 1, a microwave remote sensing satellite. Some of the important applications being carried out by the Ministries/Departments of Government of India using space technology are given below:

Ministry/Department Application

M/o Agriculture & Farmers Welfare . Crop Acreage Estimation & Production Forecasting . Agricultural Drought Assessment . Inventory and Management of Horticulture crops

M/o Environment Forests & Climate . Biennial Forest Cover Mapping Change . Monitoring Snow & Glaciers and Snow-Melt Runoff in Himalayan Region . Coastal Zone Monitoring

M/o Water Resources, River . Command Area Development and Assessment of Irrigation Development & Ganga Rejuvenation Potential . Repair, Renovation and Restoration of Water Bodies

22

. Reservoir sedimentation assessment

M/o Urban Development . National Urban Information System . Enabling Master plan preparation for 500 cities / towns

M/o Culture . Inventory and site management plans for 4000 heritage enabling ease of business

M/o Drinking Water and Sanitation . Ground Water Prospects Zones and Suitable sites for constructing recharge structures

M/o Civil Aviation . Dedicated Satellite Communication Network (DSCN), linking several operational airports for exchange of voice and data for various services . GAGAN (GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation) for safety of life applications and en-route navigation

D/o Post . Geo-tagging of post offices . Postman beat maps

M/o Earth Sciences . Space derived inputs for operational weather forecast, tropical cyclone tracking & Ocean State Forecast . Potential Fishing Zone Advisory

M/o Petroleum & Natural Gas . Planning pipeline corridor

M/o Rural Development . Wasteland change monitoring . Monitoring & Evaluation of Watershed development

M/o Rural Development . Wasteland change monitoring . Monitoring & Evaluation of Watershed development

M/o Information and Broadcasting . Satellite based communication services for broadcasting

M/o Power . Environmental impact assessment of Power projects

M/o Panchayati Raj . Space Based Information Support for Decentralized Planning at Panchayat level . SATCOM centres at every block for training.

M/o Tribal Affairs . Potential Pond Identification for developing fish culture in village ponds. . Identifying sites for new ponds for harvesting runoff

D/o Health & Family Welfare . Telemedicine Centres at pilgrimage sites and remote areas

Nowadays there is a big assortment of satellite systems actively recording information about the Earth. A wide variety of imagery is available from satellites. Both active and passive sensors, operating from the microwave to the ultraviolet regions of the electromagnetic spectrum collect a large amount of

23

information about the earth's surface every day. Each of the systems varies in terms of their spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal resolution. Those characteristics play an important role in defining which applications the sensor is best suited for. The main benefits of satellite remote sensing are the following:

a) The data are available for large areas: for example: 35 000km2 for LAND SAT scene, 3 600 km2 for SPOT scene b) The data collected are related to the Earth surface features c) To collect data the sensors use the wide spectrum of electromagnetic spectrum (EMS) and use several band (areas of the EMS) at once (LANDSAT TM 7, hyper-spectral: from tens to hundreds of spectral bands d) They are available on a regular basis for all points on the globe (repetitive coverage): data may be acquired every 1-3 days (16 days in the case of LANDSAT, 1-3 days in the case of SPOT) e) 5-They are objective: the sensor-transmission-reception system involves no human intervention f) They are in digital form and geometrically corrected images can be used to provide a base to overlay other data or to be used as part of an analysis in a GIS environment.

Conclusion: India ranks third among the most attractive investment destinations for technology transactions in the world. Modern India has had a strong focus on science and technology, realizing that it is a key element of economic growth. India is among the topmost countries in the world in the field of scientific research, positioned as one of the top five nations in the field of space exploration. The country has regularly undertaken space missions. Currently 27 satellites including 11 that facilitate the communication network to the country are operational, establishing India’s progress in the space technology domain. India is likely to take a leading role in launching satellites for the SAARC nations; generating revenue by offering its space facilities for use to other countries. India’s space program is focused primarily on peaceful uses. With a number of scientific and technological applications including telemedicine, tele-education, disaster warning, search and rescue operations, mobile communications, remote sensing and weather given that India is a country with huge developmental challenges. It is always tough to make an argument justifying allocations for space missions that do not have a direct bearing on development. The examples presented in this article have showed how remote sensing data from various sources, in combination with other ancillary data, have been successfully used for operational assessment of agriculture in the country. However, there is a need to further extend the area of activity. Following future developments are envisaged in this field. Taking up more crops and covering more number of states, developing spectral yield models for all crops.

24

References:

1. Agriculture and Food Security, SIRD BARC Publication, 2013. 2. Media reports, Press Releases, press Information Burear, Union Budget 2016-2017 3. Remote sensing based crop inventory: A review of Indian experience. 4. Panigrahy, S. and Ray, S. S. (2006) Remote Sensing. In: Environment and Agriculture. (Eds. K. L. Chadha & M. S. Swaminathan). Malhotra Publishing House, New Delhi. pp. 361-375. 5. Parihar, J. S. and Manjunath, K. R. (2013) Agricultural Applications: Evolution during last 25 Years. NNRMS Bulletin. March, 2013, pp. 58-75. 6. Tripathy, R. Chaudhari, K. N., Mukherjee, J., Ray, S. S., Patel, N.K., Panigrahy, S. and Parihar, J. S. (2013) Forecasting wheat yield in Punjab state of India by combining crop simulation model WOFOST and remotely sensed inputs. Remote Sensing Letters 4 (1), 19-28.

04

TECHNOLOGICAL INNOVATION: A PROSPECTIVE SOURCE OF ECONOMIC GROWTH

DILSHAD AHMAD ANSARI FACULTY OF COMMERCE, A. ISLAMIA DEGREE COLLEGE LUCKNOW MOHD SAJID FACULTY OF COMMERCE, A. ISLAMIA DEGREE COLLEGE LUCKNOW

AKIL HUSSAIN FACULTY OF COMMERCE, A. ISLAMIA DEGREE COLLEGE LUCKNOW. MOHD NASEEM SIDDIQUI FACULTY OF COMMERCE, A. ISLAMIA DEGREE COLLEGE LUCKNOW

Abstract The theoretical and empirical study of economic growth has produced a voluminous and diverse literature. These studies take such a wide variety of approaches that it is difficult to summarise their results concisely. This paper reviews the empirical evidence on one very important aspect of the growth process - the effect of innovation on growth. Any serious study of the literature on technical progress and growth must start with the work of Solow (1957) who derived estimates of US total factor productivity between 1909 and 1949. His startling conclusion was that technical change (the whole of the so-called ‘residual’ was attributed to technical change) was responsible for the majority of economic growth during the period. However, later work by researchers in this growth accounting tradition, such

25

as Denison (1962) and Jorgenson and Griliches (1967), who adjusted for 2 changes in labour quality and for various measurement errors, reduced the residual to around one third of economic growth. Uneasy with the neo-classical growth accounting assumption that all of total factor productivity growth is caused by exogenous technical change, other researchers attempted to augment the neo-classical model by explicitly modelling the time series of total factor productivity by using data on innovation. There can be no single measure of the output of the innovation process. Indicators such as Research and Development (R&D) spending, patenting, technological balance of payments, machinery imports, and diffusion all jostle for recognition. Most researchers have chosen to use R&D spending as their measure of technical change, usually because R&D spending data are easiest to compile and most reliable.

Introduction The economic growth and development have been debated for centuries. Industrialization had brought forth permanent changes in the economic and human activity. After the Depression of the 1929-1933 span, the importance of these processes increases. Overcoming any economic difficulties, whether we speak about the decreasing of the unemployment rate or about the external equilibrium, a correlation was made with the economic growth and development. Any decision made at a state or supra-state level aimed at reaching these two objectives. Today, more than anytime, in a recessionary, liberalized economy, in a world marked by a strong demographic increase, by the depletion of natural resources, by changes of climate and of ecosystem destruction, we are more preoccupied than ever by the problems of economic growth and development. Hereinafter will make, an epistemological analysis of these two processes. Though no unanimously accepted definition has been forgotten by now, most of the theoreticians think of the economic development as a process that generates economic and social, quantitative and, particularly, qualitative changes, which causes the national economy to cumulatively and durably increase its real national product. In contrast and compared to development, economic growth is, in a limited sense, an increase of the national income per capita, and it involves the analysis, especially in quantitative terms, of this process, with a focus on the functional relations between the endogenous variables; in a wider sense, it involves the increase of the GDP, GNP and NI, therefore of the national wealth, including the production capacity, expressed in both absolute and relative size, per capita, encompassing also the structural modifications of economy. We could therefore estimate that economic growth is the process of increasing the sizes of national economies, the macro-economic indications, especially the GDP per capita, in an ascendant but not necessarily linear direction, with positive effects on the economic-social sector, while development shows us how growth impacts on the society by increasing the standard of life. Typologically, in one sense and in the other, economic growth can be: positive, zero, negative. Positive economic growth is recorded when the annual average rhythms of the macro-indicators are higher than the average rhythms of growth of the population. When the annual average rhythms of growth of the macro-economic indicators, particularly GDP, are equal to those of the population growth, we can speak of zero economic growth. Negative economic growth appears when the rhythms of population growth are higher than those of the macro-economic indicators.

26

Review of Literature The importance of technology as a driver of economic growth and well-being, has been appreciated since Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations (reprinted 1976a), and emphasized most notably by Schumpeter (1942). If technology is the main driver of economic growth, then the next question is what is the main driver of technology? Rosenberg (1982) made the credible point that most economists, for most of the history of the profession, had viewed the process by which new technologies are developed and adopted as a “black box.” In the years since, partly lead by Rosenberg himself, economists have increasingly attempted to say more about what goes on inside the box, especially concerning the role of science in advancing technology. Several economic historians have examined the role of science in the advance of technology and economic growth over the broad sweep of history. Mokyr (1990, 2002), Rosenberg (Mowery and Rosenberg, 1989; Rosenberg and Birdzell, 1986), and Landes (1998), agree in the broad conclusion that the advance of science is a necessary, but not sufficient, condition for substantial and rapid advance in technology and economic growth. Nelson (1959) cataloged many examples of how science had contributed to the advance of technology. More recently, in work with Mowery (1989 11-14) Rosenberg has claimed that the distinction between science and technology is often hard to make, providing several examples of how scientific advances have resulted from the pursuit of ‘practical’ results. Although most economists adopt the view of Nelson that mainly new science enables the advance of new technology, it is not hard to find examples where the advance of science was enabled by new instruments provided by advanced technology (Ackerman, 1985). Mokyr (1990), in his broad economic history of the advance of technology over the ages, generally finds the advance to be slow and fitful until the industrial revolution. Up until the mid-1800s, the relationship between science and technology, was loose (Mansfield, 1968; Mokyr, 1990 167-170). Those who advanced science and technology shared an attitude of optimism about the prospects to understand and control nature (Landes, 1969). But beginning in the mid 19th century, and especially with the development of commercial labs toward the end of the 19th century, the relationship between science and technology became closer, with advances in science more often and more clearly being a necessary condition for technological advances. Beginning with Nelson’s taxonomic paper (1959), evidence for this latter claim has been provided by economists in a variety of forms. Griliches’s main contribution, in a pair of papers (1957, 1959), was to measure the return to scientific research on hybrid corn and to measure and explain varying rates of adoption (see: Diamond, 2004). Surveys of research managers by Nelson (1986) and by Mansfield (1991, 1992) provided evidence that science is sometimes important for technical change, although the importance varies considerably by the industry and by the subfield of science. Scientific models and approaches to ST&I for sustainability Innovation research has become active in developing approaches to address transitions towards sustainability. Several strands of research, which emerged in the last 15 years, can be identified (Markard et al. 2012), focusing on different levels of ST&I, ranging from the system level to research practice. Until today, no innovation systems – or national ST&I policies – focussed exclusively at transitions towards sustainability exist in practice yet. The models developed thus are of ideal type nature. In addition, transitions research always has a normative dimension. It shows pathways of change that are considered desirable in the sense of sustainability. The approaches thus share their ‘engaged’, normative nature in view of sustainability: Science or science policy is not seen only as promoters of growth, but are viewed as in need of a

27

direction, as means of problem-solving (Ziegler 1998). While economic innovation thinking tends to view science in terms of its economic applicability, sustainability oriented ST&I thinking argues against this ‘commodification of science’ (Radder 2010: 4). This is also expressed in the following statement by A. Smith et al. (2010: 437): “The challenge for innovation no longer rests solely in economic potential, but also in the societal changes induced by innovative activity and the consequences of this for environmental and social sustainability. Along with this broader problem framing, comes a need for broader analytical perspectives.” Systemic innovation for sustainability Since environmental concerns and innovation were first linked, a shift from a narrower focus of single innovations (such as end-of-pipe technologies, or later clean technologies) towards a broader system view (such as green innovation systems) can be detected (A. Smith et al. 2010). Among the most influential approaches in the scientific community are ‘strategic niche management’ and the ‘multi-level perspective of socio-technical transitions’ (Geels 2002; 2004). The main link between the different variants of innovation models for sustainability is that they seek an answer to the question on how to make a transition to socio- technological systems that are more sustainable (Markard et al. 2012). ‘Strategic niche management’ affirms that sustainability challenges can be addressed by purposefully creating and managing niches for developing new technologies. The basic idea resembles the evolutionary biology concept, transferred from living organisms to technologies (Schot and Geels 2007). The way to intervene is by acting against the resistance conditions that current technological trajectories have, the power constellation that defend a given technology, interests and institutions, which do not favour environmental technologies. This demands an active role from governments who must create platforms for new actors in niches to emerge, and also work in setting up experiments with technologies, to protect them from dominant market and selection mechanisms, so that they can evolve. Thus there is an intervention to foster diversity, trial and error in directions that would have otherwise not have been chosen (Kemp et al. 1998). A related strand of research is transitions management, aimed towards managing the transition in a given sector to a more sustainable state. The idea is to promote certain niches to produce such change, where policy makers learn while the experiment is on the run and have long term aims with actions in the short term to keep it alive. The approach has been criticised for the impossibility of managing every type of transition (Nill and Kemp 2009).

Conclusions In the traditional theory of economic growth, productivity is driven by exogenous (that is, unexplained) technical progress, and productivity levels and growth rates should converge over time. In contrast, new theories of economic growth argue that the rate of innovation is the result of the profit-maximising choices of economic agents, and that it is therefore possible for there to be permanent differences in productivity levels and growth rates. This paper has reviewed the evidence on these issues. Neo-classical growth theory postulates that technical progress is exogenous and proceeds at a steady rate. This is the so-called ‘manna from heaven’ view of technology. Early studies of the effect of innovation on productivity did not attempt explicitly to model technical progress, but nonetheless concluded that it played a significant role in productivity growth (Solow, 1957). With technical change apparently being so important to growth and with the assumption that it is exogenous being so intuitively and theoretically untenable, it was natural that researchers should attempt to examine technical progress in an endogenous framework. At first, the pace of empirical work (such as Terleckyj, 1974) moved faster than

28

theoretical work and researchers found that measures of the profit-maximising choices of agents (such as R&D spending) could help to explain productivity growth. Most of the empirical work in the 1970s and early 1980s was theoretically agnostic in its approach, and it was not until interest in the theory of economic growth began to revive in the 1980s that researchers began to produce models that successfully endogenized the rate of technical change. There has been a vast amount of research into the effect of innovation on productivity. A consensus has emerged that, whether measured by R&D spending, patenting, or innovation counts, innovation has a significant effect on productivity at the level of the firm, industry and country. Griliches (1988) suggests that the elasticity of output with respect to R&D is usually found to be between 0.05 and 0.1, and that the social rate of return to R&D is between 20 and 11 50%. Furthermore, attempts to model the spillovers that occur in the innovation process have usually found that these spillovers are large and significant. Neo-classical growth models (such as Solow, 1956) also suggest that levels of output and growth rates of countries and regions should converge over time. Endogenous growth models (such as Grossman and Helpman, 1991a) tend to produce more complex results where convergence does not occur, or even where there is divergence. The empirical evidence on this issue is also mixed. De Long (1988) and Romer (1987) find little empirical evidence of convergence in regressions relating the rate of growth of GDP to the initial level of GDP for a cross- section of a large number of countries. However, when Barro (1991) and Mankiw, Romer and Weil (1992) include human capital (secondary school enrolments), they find evidence of conditional convergence, as do Levine and Renelt (1992). Surveying the evidence, Fagerberg (1994) argues that while ‘catch-up’ growth is possible, it can only be realized by countries that have a sufficiently strong ‘social capability’ in investment, education, and R&D.

Reference: 1. Solow, R. (1957) ‘Technical Change and the Aggregate Production Function’, Review of Economics and Statistics, vol. 39, pp. 312-20. 2. Sterlacchini, A. (1989) ‘R&D, innovations, and total factor productivity growth in British manufacturing’, Applied Economics vol. 21, pp. 1549-62. 3. Stigler, G. (1947) Trends in Output and Employment (New York: NBER). Stoneman, P. and Francis, N. (1992) ‘Double Deflation and the Measurement of Output and Productivity in UK Manufacturing 1979-1989’, (Warwick University:mimeo) 4. Summers, R. and Heston, A. (1988) ‘A New Set of International Comparisons of Real Product and Price Levels: Estimates of 130 Countries’, Review of Income and Wealth, vol. 34, pp. 1-25. 5. Angrist, M., and R. Cook-Deegan. 2006. Who owns the genome? The New Atlantis: A Journal of Technology and Society Winter:87–96. 6. Leontief, W. 1986. Input–Output Economics, 2nd edn. Oxford University Press. Nordhaus, W. 1969. Invention, Growth and Welfare: A Theoretical Treatment of Technological Change. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

29

05

APPLICATION OF MIP: SIEVE SENSOR FOR REMOVAL OF MERCURY IN HOSPITAL WASTES: A TOOL HELPING INDIA MOVING AHEAD IN TECHNOLOGY

SHRINKHALA SRIVASTAVA AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW SAURABH SRIVASTAVA BABU BANARASI DAS COLLEGE OF DENTAL SCIENCES, LUCKNOW Abstract The most common routes of exposure to mercury in the healthcare facility include inhalation of inorganic mercury vapour after a spill or accidental skin contact with mercury. Accidental spills of liquid mercury can increase the levels of mercury in the air or wastewater of a HCFs. Establishing protocols for proper cleanup of spills involving mercury is an on flow challenge in Healthcare Sector where Bio safety and Bioethics are first law to be followed for human safety.

The surface ion-imprinted poly(ethylene terephthalate)- semicarbazide (PET-SC) modified chelating fibre sieves (Hg-PET-SC) were prepared using Hg(II) as a template and formaldehyde as a cross-linker and showed higher adsorption capacity and selectivity for the Hg(II) ions compared with the non-imprinted fibres (NIP-PET-SC) without a template. The maximum limit of detection values for Hg-PET-SC and NIP- PET-SC were 60.05 g/l and 24.51 g/l, respectively using MIP-PET-SC-CNE and NIP-PET-SC-CNE sensors. The selectivity coefficient of Hg(II) ions and other metal ions on Hg-PET-SC indicated an overall preference for Hg(II) ions. Rebinding and cross-selectivity studies were also carried out using various divalent ions as interferents.

Keywords: Health Care facilities, molecularly imprinted polymer, polyesters, semicarbazone, mercury.

Introduction: The most common routes of exposure in the HCFs include inhalation of inorganic mercury vapor after a spill or accidental skin contact with mercury. Accidental spills of liquid mercury can increase the levels of mercury in the air or wastewater of a healthcare facility. For all these reasons, mercury spills in the HCFs has to be managed properly and effort should be made by adopting principles of reduce, re-use, re-cycle or recovery options or even eliminate the use of mercury in HCFs in a phased manner. Mercury- containing products can be found almost anywhere in the HCFs. Following are the main sources of mercury in health care facilities: Accident & Emergency Department b. Dental Department c. Endoscopy Department Some of the mercury based instruments used for diagnosis purposes by the health care facilities are as follows:

a) Thermometers (used for measurement of body temperatures); b) Sphygmomanometers (used for measurement of blood pressure);

30

c) Dental amalgam; d) Oesophageal dilators (also called bougie tubes); e) Cantor tubes and Miller Abbott tubes (used to clear intestinal obstructions); f) Laboratory chemicals (fixatives, stains, reagents, preservatives); g) Medical batteries etc.

Traditional treatment processes are limited in their ability to remove emerging contaminants from water, and there is a need for new technologies that are effective and feasible. A review on recent research results on molecularly imprinted (MIP) and non-imprinted (NIP) polymers was given by Murray and Ormeci which evaluated their potential as a treatment method for the removal of mercury contaminants from wastewater. It also discussed the relative benefits and limitations of using MIP or NIP for water and wastewater treatment. Further, a review on use of advanced polymeric materials for metal ions including mercury was proposed by Shakerain et al [1, 2]. MIPs are synthetic polymers possessing specific cavities designed for target molecules. They are prepared by copolymerization of a cross-linking agent with the complex formed from a template and monomers that have functional groups specifically interacting with the template through covalent or noncovalent bonds. Subsequent removal of the imprint template leaves specific cavities whose shape, size, and functional groups are complementary to the template molecule. Because of their predetermined selectivity, MIPs can be used as ideal materials in Health care sector. Especially, MIP- based composites offer a wide range of potentialities in biomedical waste treatment. But segregation of reusable and non-reusable mercury containing products, its recycling , proper handling and disposal of mercury, mercury-containing equipment, collected mercury spill and laboratory chemicals and establishing protocols for proper cleanup of spills involving mercury is an onflow challenge in Healthcare Sector where Biosafety and Bioethics are first law to be followed for human safety [3]

Taking an idea of using polymer sieves for chelation of Hg [4], this paper also focuses on the same technique trying to make it useful for treatment biomedical mercury waste management.

Results and Discussion

MIP developmentNot going in detail : discussion about materials and methods, MIP and NIP preparations, synthesis and characterization have been already reported in Shrinkhala et al., [5]. Mechanism of formation of Hg2+ imprinted polymer has been given in Figure1.

31

Fig. 1. Mechanism of formation of Hg2+ imprinted polymer

2.2. MIP as Sieves:Polymers that have been imprinted can then be formed into a variety of materials, including nanoparticles, thin membranes, and gels, which can be used to make a filter. This is because of their porosity and large surface-area (Figures 2 and 3). The filter can be applied in many ways. If a membrane is produced to absorb pollutants in a liquid medium, it can be coated on a large surface area screen which can be replaced. For Gases, more surface area is required. Large catalytic converter style filters can be made to maximize contact between the gas molecules and the filter itself [6]. Here, the interior of a sieve has a huge amount of surface area for a relatively little size.

Acc. V Spot Magn Det WD 2 m

15.0 KV 2.5 7398 X SE 12.4 Fig. 2. Development of molecularly imprinted sieves Fig. 3. SEM image of MIP.

Sensor Development:Taking cognizance of difficulty in developing ultra-thin layer coating of MIP (Hg)- film to enhance mass-transfer kinetics on the modified solid-electrodes,, in developing a micro-phase film inwardly exposed and accessible at electrode surface to recapture analyte unhindered, and in enhancing the LOD to ng mL-1 range. Carbon nanotube electrodes (CNE) have self-adsorptive characteristics rendering high stability and reproducibility with stable MIP (Hg)-DMF casting solution. Since CNE used was preanodised at +0.4 V (vs. Ag/AgCl), the additional forces allowing firm adherence of film onto a minute mercury drop were coulombic interactions at electrode / film interface through

32

electron-rich functionalities (>C=O, -NH2 and ring nitrogen) in the similar fashion as shown in Fig. 4 and 5. The stability of MIP (Hg) cavities and their molecular recognition characteristics remained unaltered during film coating, template retrieval, and binding-rebinding processes . The preanodisation helped electrocatalytic action of the electrode by generating carbonyl, carboxylate and hydroxyl radical species through consumption of dissolved oxygen of the cell content; and therefore, the catalysed voltammetric response with this electrode could be feasible even in the absence of supporting electrolyte and deaeration of the cell content [7].

Fig. 4. Graphical representation of MIP- sieve sensor: Absorption and Desorption

Fig. 5. (a) MIP (Hg) coated CNE (b) MIP-Hg rebinded - CNE

33

3. Voltammetric Detection

Fig. 6 (a). cathodic stripping cyclic voltammograms of Hg with MIP (Hg)-modified CNE. Hg accumulation potential: +0.8V (vs. Ag/AgCl); MIP (Hg) concentration: 450 g mL-1; deposition time of polymer: 30s; accumulation time of analyte: 60s;

Fig. 6 (b). DPCSV measurement of Hg with MIP(Hg)-modified CNE in aqueous samples [various Hg concentration (g mL-1): DPCSV with NIP(Hg)-modified CNE

Optimisation of analytical parameters for cyclic as well as differential pulse cathodic stripping voltammetry was adopted from Prasad et al., [7]. As could be seen from CV runs (Fig. 6(a)), in stripping mode at 300 mVs-1, obtained at MIP (Hg)-modified CNE sensors, confirm the reproducibility of the modification process.

Rebinding and Cross-selectivity Studies The rebinding and cross- selectivity studies were carried out with sieves using MIP as well as NIP coating using bivalent Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions. The diluted water sample when passed through MIP-sieve rebinded Hg2+ selectively which was confirmed by Mercury Test Kit for Drinking Water (Boris'), The cross- selectivity studies, showed very good selectivity of MIP for Hg2+, but not that for Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions, as shown in this figure. To confirm this, separate confirmatory tests for Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions using NaOH and further proceeding with EDTA titrations were performed.However, there was a chance of false positives using NIP sieve as is shown in figure 7.

34

Fig. 7. Rebinding and cross-selectivity studies using MIP/NIP with other metal ions.

The maximum adsorption capacity values were found out using Boris’ mercury test kit for Hg-PET-SC – CNE and NI-PET-SC – CNE were 60.05 g/l and 24.51 g/l, respectively.

Conclusion The selectivity coefficient of Hg (II) ions and other metal ions on Hg-PET-SC indicated an overall preference for Hg (II) ions. However, there is the problem of false positives. Proper management of Hospital Pollution is still a challenge. This process is reliable and cost-effective. But the sludge disposal is however hazardous and still a problem to be solved as it is non-biodegradable.

Acknowledgements Our warm thanks to Department of Chemistry, Banaras Hindu University, for lending a helping hand in characterization of MIP/NIP by IR and 1HNMR. As well as, we also extend our thanks to Department of Physics, Banaras Hindu University, for Electron microscopic imaging (SEM) of imprinted polymer.

References 1. A. Murray 1, B. Ormeci, Application of molecularly imprinted and non-imprinted polymers for removal of emerging contaminants in water and wastewater treatment: a review, Environ Sci Pollut Res Int., 19(9) (2012) 3820-30, doi: 10.1007/s11356-012-1119-2.

2. F. Shakerian, Ki-H. K., E.Kwon, J.E. Szulejko, P.Kumar, S. Dadfarnia, A. M. H. Shabani : Advanced polymeric materials: Synthesis and analytical application of ion imprinted polymers as selective

35

sorbents for solid phase extraction of metal ions: Review Article. TrAC Trends in Analytical Chemistry, 83( B)( 2016) 55-69.

3. J.C. Babu, Scientist ‘C’: Environmentally Sound Management of Mercury Waste in Health Care Facilities : Draft Report , HWM Division, Central Pollution control board, Delhi, September 2010.

4. M. Monier, , D.A. Abdel-Latif, Synthesis and characterization of ion-imprinted chelating fibers based on PET for selective removal of Hg2+, Chem. Eng. Jour., 221 (2013) 452–460.

5. S. Srivastava, A. Mehrotra, A. Srivastava; Molecularly Imprinted Polymer Sieves for Selective Mercury Sensing in Industrial Waste Water: Proceedings of International Seminar on Sources of Planet Energy, Environment and Disaster Science: Challenges and Strategies,2015.

6. Y. Zhao*, Y. Shen, L. Bai, R. Hao, and L. Dong, Synthesis and CO2 Adsorption Properties of Molecularly Imprinted Adsorbents, Environ. Sci. Technol., 46 (3) (2012) 1789–1795, DOI: 10.1021/es203580b

7. B. B. Prasad, S. Srivastava, K. Tiwari, P. S. Sharma, Ascorbic acid sensor based on molecularly imprinted polymer-modified hanging mercury drop electrode, Materials Science and Engineering C, 29 (2009) 1082.

06

IMPACT OF ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION ON BIODIVERSITY PALLAVI DIXIT DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, MAHILA VIDYALAYA DEGREE COLLEGE, LUCKNOW

Abstract Pollution is the introduction of different type of waste materials in to our natural environment that causes adverse affects to the ecosystem we rely on .Pollution is a worldwide problem and its potential to influence Biodiversity. Adverse quality of air, water can kill many organismsand plants..Respiratory diseases, cardiovascular diseases, throat inflammation, chest pain and many other diseases like cancer, birth defects etc which may be associated with the environmental exposure. Environmental pollution causes not only physical but also psychological and behavioural disorders. We are already seeing its effects in the form of global warming, acid - rain, ozone layer depletion etc. Environmental pollution is a problem both in developed and developing countries. Factors such as population growth and urbanisation in variably place greater demand on the planet and stretch the use of natural resources to the maximum. Carrying capacity of the earth significantly smaller than the demands place on it by large number of human populations and over use of natural resources often results in natures degradation

36

.To protect our environment from the adverse effect of the pollution , many Nations world wide have enacted legislation to regulate various types of pollution as well as mitigate the adverse effects of pollution . Pollution control is a term used in environmental management. It means the control of emissions and effluents in to air , water, soil. In the hierarchy of pollution control , Pollution prevention and waste minimization are more desirable than pollution control .Pollution in all its various forms causes immense damage therefore it is important to prevent these forms to look forward to a greener ,cleaner and much more pleasant living experience.

Keywords: Environmental Pollution , Biodiversity, Impact, Consequences.

Introduction Today we are living in a competitive era, where the race for modernization between the countries of the world has leads to the excess growth of industrialization and urbanization that causes environmental disbalance and change in climatic conditions. Environmental Pollution is the introduction of different type of waste materials in to our natural environment that causes adverse affects to the ecosystem we rely on .Pollution is a worldwide problem and its potential to influence Biodiversity. Some major consequences of Environmental Pollution are global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion etc. Biodiversity refers to variation of life forms and it depends upon the climatic conditions. Environmental Pollution is having wide spread impact on biodiversity including gene, species and ecosystem. Biodiversity refers to variation in life forms. It is a variety & differences among living organism from all sources including terrestrial, marine, other aquatic ecosystem ecological complexes of which they are part. India is one of the richest nations in term of biodiversity. It is estimates that about 45000 species of plant & 65000 species of animals are found in India. Flowering plants comprise 15000 species of which several hundred Species are endemic. Amongs the animal species about 4000 molluscs, 50000 species of insects, 6500 other vertebrates, 2546 fishes, 197 amphibians, 408 reptiles, 1224 birds & 350 species of mammals are found in different habitats. The mega biodiversity places of India are Western ghat & Eastern Himalaya ( MoEF,2000 and Myers et. al.2000.) Biodiversity is essential for maintaining the ecological function, including stabilizing of the water cycle, maintenance of replenishment of soil fertility, pollination & cross fertilization of crops & other vegetations ,protection against soil erosion etc. Rapid change in environmental conditions affects biodiversity adversely and there impact are projected increasingly severe in future It is estimated that about 27000 species became extinct every year. If these goes on 30% of world species may be gone by the year 2050.

Biodiversity loss & climate change: Impact & consequences Ecosystem & Biodiversity depends upon the climatic conditions, change in climatic conditions having huge spread impact across multiple scale of biodiversity including gene, Species & Ecosystem. Excessive exploitation of natural resources by human causes environmental disbalance & change in climatic condition. Industrialization, urbanization, deforestation increasing population are main anthropogenic activities that change the environmental conditions. Some major consequences of Environmental Pollution are global warming, ozone layer depletion, acid rain etc. The biggest threat to the environment is global warming, increase in the concentration of green house gases especially CO2 in the

37

environment that causes change in weather pattern. Climatic factors such as temperature and precipitation change in a region beyond the tolerance of a species may raise the rate of many physiological processes such as photosynthesis in plants. Extreme temperature can be harmful when beyond the physiological limit of a plant or animal. This is already a strong evidence that the plant species are shifting their ranges in altitude and latitude as a response of changing regional climate. Changing environmental condition are therefore expected to lead to change in life-cycle events and these have been recorded for many plant species. Species respond in many different ways to climate change. Variation in distribution, phenology and abundance of species will leads to inevitable change in the relative abundance of species and their interactions. Environmental variables will not only act in isolation but also in combination with one another and with other pressures, such as habitat degradation, loss or the introduction of exotic species.

Conclusion Rapid change in climate due to Environmental Pollution effects nations’ biodiversity and these impacts are projected increasingly severe in future. Environmental Pollution have had enormous impact on biodiversity in past and will remain one of the major driver of biodiversity pattern in future. Pollution in all its various forms causes immense damage therefore it is important to prevent these forms to look forward to a greener ,cleaner and much more pleasant living experience

References:

1. Myers N. “Threatened biotas: ‘hot spots’ in tropical forests”. Environmentalist 8 (3): 187 - 208 (1998) 2. Myers N. Enviromnentalist 10 (4): 253- 256 (1990). 3. Lynch M., Lande R. Sinauer Associates. Pp. 234-50 (1993). 4. D. L. Hawksworth. Biodiversity: Measurement and Estimation,. Springer. P. 6 (1996). 5. Jeffrey K. McKee. Rutgers University Press. P. 108 (2004). 6. Kevin J. Gaston & John I. Spicer. “Biodiversity: An Introduction” , Blackwell Publishing. 2nd Ed. (2004). 7. Thomas CD, Cameron A, Green RE, et al. Nature 427 (6970). (2004). 8. Botkin DB, et al. BioScience 57 (3): 227- 36 (2007). 9. Mackey, B. Proceedings of a WWF and IUCN World Commission on Protected Areas symposium, Canberra, 18-19 June 2007, Sydney: WWF-Australia . pp. 90-6 (2007). 10. UNDP (1998). Eco-regional Co-operation for Biodiversity Conservation in the Himalayas. Proceeding of a regional meeting organized by UNDP in Co-operation with WWF and ICIMOD 11. Thomas E.C., (2007), Climate Change and its impact on India Retrieved Nov. 26, 2007 from http://www.rediffnews.com . 12. Kumar.Vinod, Chopra , A.K. (2009) Impact of climate change on Biodeversity of India with special reference to Himalaya region:- An over view from Journal of Applied and Natural Sciences 1(i): 117-122 (2009). 13. Mayer , N , Mittermeier R.A., Mittermeier, C.G. D.A Fonseca, G. A. B. and Kent, J. (2000) Biodiversity Hot spots for conservation Priorities , Nature, 403; 853-858 14. MoEF (2000), Annual Report 1999-2000; New Delhi; Ministry of Environment and forest,

38

Government of India. 15. Sharma, Kumar, Dushyant & Mishra, J.K. Impact of Environmental Changes on Biodivesity. Indian J. Sci. Res. 2(4): 137-139, 2011.

07

OCCUPATIONAL LIFESTYLE DISEASES IN INDIA UPASANAYADAV DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW-226017, U.P., INDIA

Introduction The way a person or group of people lives is one associated withLifestyle diseases. Lifestyle diseases are the diseases whose occurrence is primarily based on the daily habits of people .It occur when environmenthas not an appropriate relationship with people. Various life style diseases areheart diseases,diabetes, obesity, hypertension stroke, diseases associated with smoking and alcohol and drug are cancer, chronic bronchitis, , premature mortality etc. Lifestyle diseases which are also called diseases of diseases of civilization orlongevity interchangeably are diseases that appear to increasein frequency as the number of industries increase in a country which in turn the average life of human being increases . There are severalfactors leading to the occurrence oflifestyle diseases are as followswrong body posture, bad food habits, disturbed biological clockand physicalinactivity .However, the significant factorcontributing to lifestyle diseasesof the present day may depend upon the nature occupations of thepeople. By giving priority to IT and other similar services and neglecting the very base of the agrarian culture,the occupational patternin India has undergone drastic changes in recent decades. Changes in occupation, has changed the food habits of the society that has gradually caused the spread of several lifestyle diseases in our society.

Mounting figures of lifestyledisorders: To identify the magnitude of lifestylediseases several studies have been conducted by different organizations in India. According to a survey conducted by the Associated Chamber of Commerceand Industry (ASSOCHAM), 68percent of working women in the age bracket of 21-52 years were found to be affected with lifestyle disorders such aschronic backache, diabetes hypertension obesityand depression. Long hours of work under strict deadlines cause up to 75percent of working women to suffer from general anxiety disorderor depression , compared to women with lesser levels of psychological demand at workhas been summarized by Preventive Healthcare and Corporate Female Workforce. Women employed in sectors that demand more time like those intouring jobs, media, knowledge process outsourcing and are unable to take leave when they are unwell. Stressed and continuous working conditions force themselves to work mainly due to job insecurity, especially duringthe current financial meltdown. In India, around 10 percent of adults suffer from hypertension while thecountry is home to 25-30 million diabetics. Three out of every 1,000 people suffer a stroke.

39

Dominant role in Indian economy both in terms of contribution to GDP and its employment generation capability has been played byIT sector. It was estimated that this sector has increased its contributionto India’s GDP from 1.2 percent in FY 1998 to 7.5 percent in FY 2012. Moreover, this sector has also led to massive employment generation. The industry continues to be a net employment generator- expected to add 230,000 jobs in FY 2012, thus providing direct employment to about 2.8million, and indirectly employing8.9 million people. Generallybeing a dominant player in theglobal outsourcing sector IndianIT sector has emerged to be a keydevelopment strategy. Due to theabove factors, majority of Indianyouth depend directly or indirectlyon this priority sector. However,according to the findings of thestudy by ASSOCHAM, around55 percent of young workforceengaged in India’s IT sector are stricken with lifestyledisorders due to factors likeunhealthy eating habits, tight deadlines, hecticwork schedules, irregular andassociated stress. More than halfof the respondents participated inthe survey said that due to hectic working environment and irregular food timings they directly place orders to street food vendors,fast food outlets, and roadside eateriesoperating outside their officesserving ready to eat high calorie processed food items like noodles,burgers, pizza, and fried stuff likesamosas along with aerated drinks,and coffee, etc. Sleeping disorders are alarmingly growing among the employees in the corporate workfield. ASSOCHAM records that 78 percent of corporate employees suffer from sleeping disordersleading to Impact of Insomnia on Health and Productivity. Due todemanding schedules and highstress levels, nearly 78 percent of the corporate employees sleep less than 6 hours in a day whichleads to sleep disorders amongst them. The report is based on the survey conducted in the major cities likeKolkata, Chennai, Ahmedabad, Hyderabd,Pune,Chandigarh,Dehradun Delhi, Mumbai, etc. As per ASSOCHAM’S corporate employees’ survey result, 36 percentof the sample population are also suffering from obesity. It can be logically summarised that obesity alone can modify occupational morbidity, mortality and injury risks that can further affect workplace absence, disability, and productivity and healthcare costs. Almost 21 percent of the sample corporate employees suffer from another serious lifestyle disease called depression. High blood pressure and diabetes are the fourth and fifth largest diseases with a share of 12 percent and 8 percent respectively as suffered among the corporate employees.A striking case of life style disorders found in the India’s most developed state, Kerala which is almost on par with some of the European countries and America in terms of development indictors.The state is fast emerging as the lifestyle diseases capital of India with the prevalence of diabetes, obesity ,hypertensionand other risk factors for heart disease reaching levels comparable to those in America, as revealed in a recentstudy done by Dr K R Thankappanand his colleagues at the AchuthaMenon Centre for Health ScienceStudies. It was found that overall prevalence of diabetes in Kerala is about 16.2 percent. This is estimated to be 50 percent higher than in the US, according to the results of the study published in the IndianJournalofMedical Research.High blood pressure is present in32 percent people, comparable torecent estimates in the US. Closeto 57 percent people studied hadabnormal levels of cholesterol, while 39.5 percent had low HDL cholesterol. The prevalence ofsmoking in men and use of alcohol are dangerously growing in the state. This transition of the state to an era of life style diseases is driven by economic growth, urbanization and our changing food habits.

40

Economic and productivityimpact:It is predicted that globally, deaths from non communicablediseases (NCD) will increase by77 percent between 1990 and 2020 and that most of these deaths will occur in the developing regions of the world including India.These conditions not only cause enormous human suffering, they also threat the economies of many countries as they impact on the older and experienced members of the workforce. In India alone, heart ailments, stroke and diabetes are themost demanding ones which are expected to take away the country’s gross national income to a huge extent by the year 2015.As per the report, jointly preparedby the World Health Organizationand the World Economic Forum,India will incur an accumulatedloss of $236.6 billion by 2015 on account of unhealthy lifestyles and faulty diet. The resultant chronic diseases like heart disease, stroke, cancer, diabetes and respiratoryduration and slow progression, will severely affect people’s earnings.The income loss to Indians because of these diseases, which was $8.7 billion in 2005, is projected to rise to $54 billionin2015. ASSOCHAM’s healthcare survey further reveals that 41 percent of employees spend in the range of Rs.500-5000 on health care in a financial year. Over 36 percent of the survey respondents say that they spend less than Rs. 500 on their health expenditure ina year. 21 percent of the employee’s health expenditure ranged between Rs. 5,000-50000, as they suffered from diabetes, acute liver disease, kidney disease, high blood pressure and stroke. Merely 2 percent ofthe employees spend more than Rs. 50,000 due to heart disease, paralytic attack, surgery etc.India’s rapid economic growth could be slowed by a sharp rise in the prevalence of heart disease,stroke and diabetes, and the successful information technology industry is likely to be the hardest hit. So-called lifestyle diseases are estimated to have wiped $ 9 billion off the country’s national income in 2005, but the cost could reach more than £ 100 billion over the next 10 years if corrective action is not taken soon. The study by the Indian Council for Research on International Economic Relations says that although India’s boomhas brought spiralling corporateprofits and higher incomes foremployees, it has also led to a surgein workplace stress and lifestylediseases. The emerging lifestyle diseases not only affect the economic conditions of the individuals butalso the productivity of the economy which is going to be threatened dangerously in the near future.majority of employees especially those in the IT sector suffer from different types of health disorders and obesity, the productivity that depends on the efficiency and enthusiastic involvement of youth may in all way have to be compromised. The wrong choice of occupation in the blind run for higher salaries and the resultantly developing food habits generate all kinds of evil effects to the health ofour youth. Over exploitation of thepotentials of our youth particularly those in the IT sector may in course of time depreciate their efficiency and productivity leading to poor economic performance of the economy.

Concluding remarks:A healthy lifestyle must be adopted to combat these diseases with a proper balanced diet,physical activity and by giving due respect to biological clock.To decrease the ailments caused by occupational postures, one should avoid long sitting hours and should take frequent breaks for stretching or for other works involving physical movements. In this revolutionised era we cannot stop doing the developmental work,but we can certainly reduce our ailments by incorporating these simple and effective measures to our lives. The working conditions especially in the IT sector should be properly monitored assuring that the potentials of our youth are not overexploited by the corporate profit motive employers. Moreover,the consumption pattern giving priority to fast food culture has to

41

be effectively controlled. Even though, consumerism increases spending and boosts a country’s economy therefore increases its status around the globe, the evidence presented demonstrates the effects of unregulated consumption inmodern society. Here is the role the media, marketers and social class play in moulding an individuals’identity, protecting their good health and the efficiency and productivity of nation’s huge human resources.

References 1. American College of Preventive Medicine.Lifestyle Medicine—Evidence Review.June 30,2009. Available at: http://www.acpm.org/LifestyleMedicine.htm. Accessed September18, 2009. 2. Ford ES, Bergmann MM, Kröger J, Schienkiewitz A, Weikert C, Boeing H. Healthy living is the best revenge: fi ndings from the European Prospective Investigation IntoCancer and Nutrition-Potsdam study. Arch Intern Med. 2009;169(15):1355-1362. 3. Mozaffarian D, Wilson PW, Kannel WB. Beyond established and novel risk factors:lifestyle risk factors for cardiovascular disease. Circulation. 2008;117(23):3031-3038. 4. Samuelson RJ. Let them go bankrupt, soon. Solving Social Security and Medicare.Newsweek.2009 Jun1;153(22):23. Available at: http://www.newsweek.com/id/199167.Accessed September 23, 2009. 5. Ornish D. Intensive lifestyle changes and health reform. Lancet Oncol.2009;10(7):638-639.

08

PAINT INDUSTRIES AND ITS EFFECT ON COMMON MAN

RICHA KHARE AND SMRITI AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY LUCKNOW. Introduction Paints are stable mechanical mixtures of one or more pigments which impart desired colour and to protect the film from penetrating radiation, such U. V. rays. The pigments and the extenders are carried or suspended in drying oils called vehicle. Which is a film forming material, to which other ingredients are added in varying amount e .g. linseed oil, tung oil, castor oil, tall oil etc. Boiled Linseed oil is prefered to unboil oil because it develops a good drying power and requires only two days for drying. The drying time is reduced further by adding driers to the paint. Driers act to promote the process of film formation and hardening. Thinners maintain the uniformity of the film through a reduction in the viscosity of the blend. The purpose of paint may be protective or decorative or both and can be applied on a metal or wood surface. It is applied by brushing, dipping, spraying, or roller coating. The important varieties of paints are emulsion paints, latex paints, metallic paints, epoxy resin paints, oil paints, water paints or distempers etc.

42

Background, aims and scope The building materials are recognised to be major contributors to indoor air contamination by volatile organic compounds (VOCs). The improvement of the quality of the environment within buildings is a topic of increasing research and public interest. Legislation in preparation by the European Commission may induce, in the near future, European Union Member States to solicit the industries of paints, varnishes and flooring materials for taking measures, in order to reduce the VOC emissions resulting from the use of their products. Therefore, product characterisation and information about the influence of environmental parameters on the VOC emissions are fundamental for providing the basic scientific information required to allow architects, engineers, builders, and building owners to provide a healthy environment for building occupants. On the other hand, the producers of coating building materials require this information to introduce technological alterations, when necessary, in order to improve the ecological quality of their products, and to make them more competitive. Studies of VOC emissions from wet materials, like paints and varnishes, have usually been conducted after applying the material on inert substrates, due to its non-adsorption and non-porosity properties. However, in real indoor environments, these materials are applied on substrates of a different nature. One aim of this work was to study, for the first time, the VOC emissions from a latex paint applied on concrete. The influence of the substrate (uncoated cork parquet, eucalyptus parquet without finishing and pine parquet with finishing) on the emissions of VOC from a water-based varnish was also studied. For comparison purposes, polyester film (an inert substrate) was used for both wet materials.

Classification of paints On the basis of their applications, paints can be classified as a) Exterior house paints Generally have constituents such as pigment (ZnO, TiO2, white lead etc.), extenders (talc, barytes, clay etc), vehicle (e.g. boiled linseed oil) and thinners (e.g. mineral spirit, naphtha etc.) Coloured pigments for light tint are also added in varying amount. b) Interior wall paints It is prepared by mixing pigments (e.g. white and colored pigments), vehicle (e.g. varnish or bodied linseed oil) and resins (e.g. emulsified phenol formaldehyde resins and casein) Module: 11 Lecture: 43 Paint industries Dr. N. K. Patel N P T E L 271 c) Marine paints Also known as antifouling paint and can be prepared by mixing various ingredients such as pigments (ZnO and venetian red), resin (shellac), driers (manganese lineolate), vehicle (coal tar), diluents (pine oil), toxic components(cuprous oxide and mercuric oxide) and small amount of bees wax. d) Emulsion paints These paints are highly durable, impermeable to dirt, resistant to washing, rapidly drying, contain water as thinner and can be easily cleaned. It contain an emulsion of alkyds, phenol formaldehyde etc.(vehicle) in water pigments and extenders are also added to get other desirable properties. e) Chemical resistant paints Consist of baked oleo resinous varnishes, chlorinated rubber compositions, bituminous varnishes and phenolic dispersion as chemical resistant materials in paint formulations. f) Fire resistant paints These paints impart a protective action on the article being coated through easy fusion of the pigments and other paint ingredients giving off fume on heating, they do not support combustion. It consist of borax, zinc borate, ammonium phosphate synthetic resins etc as anti- fire chemicals. g) Luminous paints Consist of phosphorescent paint compositions such as pigment (sulfides of Ca, Cd and Zn dispersed in spirit varnish), vehicle (chlorinated rubber, styrol etc.) and

43

sensitizer for activation in UV region. h) Latex paints These paints usually contain Protein dispersion: Prepared by soyabean proteins or casein in aqueous ammonia solution for about an hour at room temperature Pigments: ZnS,TiO2 etc dispersed in water Extenders: clay, talc, MgSiO3, BaSO4 etc. Preservatives: Penta chlorophenol Antifoaming agent: Pine oil Plasticizer: Tributylphosphate Latex: Prepared from a butadiene styrene copolymer in water. All these ingredients well stirred in water, screened, again stirred and packed. Module: 11 Lecture: 43 Paint industries Dr. N. K. Patel N P T E L 272 i) Aluminum paints Used as heat reflecting paints and consist of pigment (aluminum powder) and vehicle (spirit varnishes) and cellulose nitrate lacquers. j) Metal paints Applied on the metal surfaces or bodies for protection and decoration and are of two types Barrier coating Protective barrier is formed between the surface coated and its surroundings. These consist of pigment, vehicle, anticorrosive agents (e.g. zinc or chrome yellow), resins (e.g. alkyds, epoxy, polyamides, chlorinated rubbers and silicones) etc. Alkyd resists weathering of metals, epoxy and polyamides form tough film resistant to chemicals. Chlorinated rubbers resist action of soaps, detergents and strong chemicals and silicons are added as heat resistant and water repellents. Galvanic coating Protection is provided by self-undergoing of galvanic corrosion. e.g. Zinc coating (Galvanization) on steel. Before applying metal paints it is important to clean thoroughly the surface to be coated. Moreover, paint should be applied over a primer such as red lead by a high pressure spray gun. k) Cement paints It is prepared by mixing white cement with colouring matter or pigments, hydrated lime and fine sand as inert filler. They are available in the form of powder of particular colour. The dispersion medium may be water or oil, depending upon the purpose of coating. Water and linseed oil are used as dispersion medium for stone/brick structure and for coating of corrugated metal surfaces respectively. Before applying cement paint a primer coat is applied which consist of a dilute solution of sodium silicate and zinc sulfate. Cement paints have marked water proofing capacity, give a stable and decorative film and do not require fresh application even in four to five years, if coated even on rough surface. l) Distempers Distempers are water paints consisting of pigments which may be white as well as coloured (e.g. Reimann‘s green), extenders (e.g. chalk powder, talc), binders (e.g. casien or glue) and dispersion medium water. These water paints have good covering power, easy applicability, and smooth, pleasant looking durable film. The major disadvantage of these is the porous nature of the film which is not moisture proof. In general the paints are known for their gloss, adhesion as well as chemical and mechanical properties. They are suitable for the interior decoration as well as painting. Methods The specific emission rates of the major VOCs were monitored for the first 72 h of material exposure in the atmosphere of a standardized test chamber. The air samples were collected on Tenax TA and analysed using thermal desorption online with gas chromatography provided with both mass selective detection and flame ionisation detection. A double exponential model was applied to the VOC concentrations as a function of time to facilitate the interpretation of the results.

Results and discussion The varnish, which was introduced in the test chamber 23 h after the application of the last layer of material, emitted mainly glycolethers. Only primary VOCs were emitted, but their concentrations varied markedly with the nature of the substrate. The higher VOC concentrations were observed for the

44

parquets of cork and eucalyptus, which indicated that thev have a much higher porosity and, therefore, a higher power of VOC adsorption than the finished pine parquet (and polyester film). The paint was introduced in the chamber just after its application. Only primary VOCs were emitted (esters, phthalates, glycolethers and white spirit) but some compounds, like 2-(2-butoxyethoxy) ethanol and diethylphthalate, were only observed for paint/polyester, which suggested that they were irreversibly adsorbed by the paint/concrete. Compared with the inert substrate, the rate of VOC emissions was lower for concrete in the wet-stage (first hours after the paint application) but slightly higher later (dry- stage) as a consequence of desorption.

Conclusions As to varnish, the substrates without finishing, like cork and eucalyptus parquets, displayed a higher power of adsorption of VOCs than the pine parquet with finishing, probably because they have a higher porosity. As concerns paint, the total masses of VOCs emitted were lower for concrete than for polyester, indicating that concrete reduces the global VOC emissions from the latex paint. Concrete is seen to have a strong power of adsorption of VOCs. Some compounds, namely 2-(2-butoxyethoxy) ethanol, diethylphthalate and TEXANOL (this partially), were either irreversibly adsorbed by the concrete or desorbed very slowly (at undetected levels). A similar behaviour had not been reported for gypsum board, a paint substrate studied before.

References:

1. ASTM (1991): Standard guide for evaluation of indoor air quality models. Philadelphia, PA, American Society for Testing and Materials (D5157–91)

2. CEN - European Committee for Standardization (1999): Building products - Determination of the emission of volatile organic compounds - Part 1: Emission test chamber method. ENV- 13419–1, Berlin Beuth-Verlag

3. Chang JCS, Guo Z (1992): Characterization of organic emissions from a wood-finishing product - wood stain. Indoor Air 2, 146–153CrossRefGoogle Scholar

4. Chang JCS, Tichenor BA, Guo Z, Krebs KA (1997): Substrate effects on VOC emissions from latex paint. Indoor Air 7, 241–247CrossRefGoogle Scholar

5. De Bortoli M, Kephalopoulos S, Kirchner S, Schauenburg H, Vissere H (1999): State-of-the-art in the measurement of volatile organic compounds emitted from building products: results of European inter-laboratory comparison. Indoor Air 9, 103–116CrossRefGoogle Scholar

6. ECA (1991): Guideline for the characterisation of volatile organic compounds emitted from indoor materials and products using small test chambers. Luxembourg, Office for Official Publications of the

45

European Communities, COST Project 613: Indoor air quality and its impact on man (Report Nr.8, EUR 13593 EN)

7. ECA (1993): Determination of VOCs emitted from indoor materials and products. Inter-laboratory comparison of small chamber measurements. Luxembourg, Office for Official Publications of the European Communities: Indoor air quality and its impact on man (Report Nr. 13, EUR 15054 EN)

8. Gehrig R, Hill M, Zellweger C, Hofer P (1993): VOC-Emissions from wall paints - A test chamber study. In: Indoor Air 1993. Seppane O, Railio J, Sateri J (Eds), Espoo 2, 431–36Google Scholar

9. Guo Z, Fortmann R, Marfiak S, Tichenor BA, Sparks L, Chang J, Mason M (1996): Modeling the VOC emissions from interior latex paint applied to gypsum board. In: Indoor Air 1996. Yoshizawa S, Kimura K, Ikeda K, Tonabe S, Iwata T (Eds), Nagoya 1, 987–991Google Scholar

10. Haghighat F, Zhang Y (1999): Modeling of emission of volatile organic compounds from building materials - emission of gas-phase mass transfer coefficient. Building & Environment 34, 377– 389CrossRefGoogle Scholar

11. Jorgensen RB, Bjoseth O, Malvik B (1995): Emission from wall paints - The influence of the wall material. In: Healthy Buildings 1995. Maroni M (Ed), Milan 2, 977–983Google Scholar

12. Miksch RR, Anthon DW, Fanning LZ, Hollowell CD, Revzan K, Glanville J (1981): Modified pararosaniline method for the determination of formaldehyde in air. Analytical Chemistry 53, 2118– 2123CrossRefGoogle Scholar

13. Sparks LE, Guo Z, Chang JC, Tichenor B A (1999): Volatile organic compounds emissions from latex paint - Part 1. Chamber experiments and source model development. Indoor Air 9, 10– 17CrossRefGoogle Scholar

14. Zhang JS, Shaw CY, Kanabus-Kaminska JM, MacDonald RA, Magee RJ, Lusztyk E, Weichert HJ (1996): Study of air velocity and turbulence effects on organic compound emissions from building materials/furnishings using a new small test chamber, In: Sources of indoor air pollution and related sinks, Tichenor AB (Ed), ASTM STP 1287. American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, USA, 184–199

46

09

HYDROPONICS - A NEED OF THE TIME

RENU GUPTA

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, LUCKNOW CHRISTIAN P.G. COLLEGE, LUCKNOW, INDIA

Abtract Plants grown with geoponics methods may suffer from all kinds of diseases, toxic pesticides, weeds, etc. caused by the presence of soil. Fertilizing the plants is always a pain and most of the times it must be done manually. In geoponics the plant's nutrition cannot be assured because there are too many factors to consider, for example whether the soil already contain enough minerals to grow the plants or whether it should be enriched with the right mix of minerals, etc. This made a way for the new alternative technique for obtaining the food and medicinal plants of better quality. Consumption of herbal medicines is widespread and increasing. Harvesting from the wild, the main source of raw material is causing loss of genetic diversity and habitat destruction. Hydroponics was found to be better alternative and can be defined as the cultivation of plants without soil, which is being commercially used in most of the western countries. This study explores the applications of this cultivation technique and to reveal its future importance. The technique can be adapted for cultivation to almost all the terrestrial plants, vegetable food crops like wheat, tomato, marijuana and many more plants. The construction of a hydroponic system requires an initial investment, hard work, and care.

Key words: Geoponics, Hydroponics, plants, minerals, techniques

Introduction Hydroponics, by definition, is a method of growing plants in a water based, nutrient rich solution. hydroponics does not use soil, instead the root system is supported using an inert medium such as perlite, rock wool, clay pellets, peat moss, or vermiculite. the word 'hydroponics' was coined by dr. w. f. gericke in 1936 to describe the cultivation of edible and ornamental plants grown in a solution of water and dissolved nutrients. the first commercial hydroponic unit in the usa was developed by gericke in 1930. american forces employed this system in the pacific to produce vegetables during World War II. In 1842, a list of nine elements believed to be essential to plant growth had been made out, based on the discoveries of the German botanists, Julius von Sachs and Wilhelm Knop. Solution culture is now considered a type of hydroponics where there is no inert medium. Before we can take a look at how hydroponics works, we must first understand how plants themselves work. Generally speaking, plants need very little to grow. They can subsist on a simple blend of water, sunlight, carbon dioxide and mineral nutrients from the soil. Plants are able to transform light energy into chemical energy to form sugars that allow them to grow and sustain themselves. Thus, plants convert carbon dioxide, water and light into sugars and oxygen through a process called photosynthesis. The photosynthesis process requires that the plant has access to certain minerals, especially nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium. These nutrients can be naturally occurring in soil and are found in most

47

commercial fertilizers. It may be noted that the soil itself is not required for plant growth but the plant simply needs the minerals from the soil. This is the basic premise behind hydroponics all the elements required for plant growth are the same as with traditional soil-based gardening. Hydroponics simply takes away the soil requirements.

Today, it is a well known fact that in some parts of the world, plant life does not grow in the available soil. One reason behind the drive to develop hydroponics was the need for growing fresh produce in non-arable areas of the world. Consumption of herbal medicines is widespread and increasing. Harvesting from the wild, the main source of raw material, is causing loss of genetic diversity and habitat destruction. When it comes to being environment friendly, hydroponics is beneficial over geoponics, mainly because these methods do not promote the use of chemical fertilizers or pesticides. There are several additional advantages as well including nutritious, healthy and clean produce, improved and consistent vegetable quality and elimination of the use of pesticides and herbicides. Pesticides and other chemicals used in conventional agriculture have an adverse environmental impact; the runoff from these chemicals, contaminates groundwater supplies. Commercial hydroponics systems eliminate these toxic chemicals and contribute substantially to keeping the groundwater free from contamination.

Techniques The two main types of hydroponics are solution culture and medium culture. Solution culture does not use a solid medium for the roots, just the nutrient solution. The three main types of solution cultures are static solution culture, continuous-flow solution culture and aeroponics. The medium culture method has a solid medium for the roots and is named for the type of medium, e.g., sand culture, gravel culture, or rock wool culture.There are two main variations for each medium, sub-irrigation and top irrigation. For all techniques, most hydroponic reservoirs are now built of plastic, but other materials have been used including concrete, glass, metal, vegetable solids, and wood. The containers should exclude light to prevent algae growth in the nutrient solution. 1. Static solution culture:In static solution culture, plants are grown in containers of nutrient solution, such as glass Mason jar (typically, in-home applications), plastic buckets, tubs, or tanks. The solution is usually gently aerated but may be un-aerated. If un-aerated, the solution level is kept low enough that enough roots are above the solution so they get adequate oxygen. A hole is cut in the lid of the reservoir for each plant. There can be one to many plants per reservoir. Reservoir size can be increased as plant size increases. A homemade system can be constructed from plastic food containers or glass canning jars with aeration provided by an aquarium pump, aquarium airline tubing and aquarium valves. Clear containers are covered with aluminum foil, butcher paper, black plastic, or other material to exclude light, thus helping to eliminate the formation of algae. The nutrient solution is changed either on a schedule, such as once per week, or when the concentration drops below a certain level as determined with an electrical conductivity meter. Whenever the solution is depleted below a certain level, either water or fresh nutrient solution is added. A Mariotte's bottle, or a float valve, can be used to automatically maintain the solution level. In raft solution culture, plants are placed in a sheet of buoyant plastic that is floated on the surface of the nutrient solution. That way, the solution level never drops below the roots.

48

2. Continuous-flow solution culture 3. In continuous-flow solution culture, the nutrient solution constantly flows past the roots. It is much easier to automate than the static solution culture because sampling and adjustments to the temperature and nutrient concentrations can be made in a large storage tank that has potential to serve thousands of plants. A popular variation is the nutrient film technique or NFT, whereby a very shallow stream of water containing all the dissolved nutrients required for plant growth is recirculated past the bare roots of plants in a watertight thick root mat, which develops in the bottom of the channel and has an upper surface that, although moist, is in the air. Subsequent to this, an abundant supply of oxygen is provided to the roots of the plants. A properly designed NFT system is based on using the right channel slope, the right flow rate, and the right channel length. The main advantage of the NFT system over other forms of hydroponics is that the plant roots are exposed to adequate supplies of water, oxygen, and nutrients. In all other forms of production, there is a conflict between the supply of these requirements, since excessive or deficient amounts of one result in an imbalance of one or both of the others. NFT, because of its design, provides a system where all three requirements for healthy plant growth can be met at the same time, provided that the simple concept of NFT is always remembered and practiced. The result of these advantages is that higher yields of high- quality produce are obtained over an extended period of cropping. A downside of NFT is that it has very little buffering against interruptions in the flow. 4. The same design characteristics apply to all conventional NFT systems. While slopes along channels of 1:100 have been recommended, in practice it is difficult to build a base for channels that is sufficiently true to enable nutrient films to flow without ponding in locally depressed areas. As a consequence, it is recommended that slopes of 1:30 to 1:40 are used. This allows for minor irregularities in the surface, but, even with these slopes, ponding and water logging may occur. The slope may be provided by the floor, or benches or racks may hold the channels and provide the required slope. Both methods are used and depend on local requirements, often determined by the site and crop requirements. 5. As a general guide, flow rates for each gully should be 1 liter per minute. At planting, rates may be half this and the upper limit of 2 L/min appears about the maximum. Flow rates beyond these extremes are often associated with nutritional problems. Depressed growth rates of many crops have been observed when channels exceed 12 metres in length. On rapidly growing crops, tests have indicated that, while oxygen levels remain adequate, nitrogen may be depleted over the length of the gully. As a consequence, channel length should not exceed 10-15 metres. In situations where this is not possible, the reductions in growth can be eliminated by placing another nutrient feed halfway along the gully and halving the flow rates through each outlet. 6. Aeroponic is a system wherein roots are continuously or discontinuously kept in an environment saturated with fine drops (a mist or aerosol) of nutrient solution. The method requires no substrate and entails growing plan

49

Plants grown hydroponically 2,3 It is practically possible to grow any types of fruit, vegetable, herb etc. using this technique. Hiercium pilosella, Hypericum perporatum, Arnica montana, Ocimum basilium (basil), Anethum gravel (dill), Chrysanthemum partherium, Aloe vera, Mentha spp.(mint), Rumex officinalis (French. sorrel), Rosemary officinalis (rosemary), cucumber, spinach, chili, lettuce, broccoli, pepper petunias, tomatoes, cabbage, green peas, echinacea, ginseng, thyme, tarragon, spearmint, peppermint, sorrel, sage, oregano,marjoram, mache, leman baln, coriander, chives, chervil, aurugula, potatoes, and many other are the popular choice of vegetables that can be grown using hydroponics. Similarly, fruits such as strawberries, watermelons and cantaloupes can also be grown using hydroponic gardening at home. Flowers show a better bloom when grown hydroponically. Growing plants hydroponically is not only easy but also effective in terms of end product. The entire hydroponic system can be made automated, so that it can be even controlled from another country. Mostly basic systems are preferred. Hydroponics allows us to grow vegetables and fruits inside our apartment.

Basic requirements of hydroponics growing medium 4, 5 The growing medium for hydroponic gardening is an inert medium which does not provide any nutrients to the plant. It only provides the basis for the roots to grow in. Coco coir fiber, Rockwool, Perlite,Vermiculite, LECA, Expanded clay, Crushed granite, Sand, Scoria, Gravel are the various types of growing mediums available for growing plants hydroponically. A growing medium allows us to add the correct amount of nutrients and also monitor the pH in a hydroponic system. In addition, using a growing medium other than soil has several advantages that include:

1. Prevention of root infestations,

2. Retention of adequate oxygen and water and

3. Increased aeration and draining.

Nutrient solutions Mineral Nutrients5, 7 There are approximately seventeen elements required for proper growth of hydroponic plants. A) Macro-nutrients 1. Carbon- Formation of organic compounds, 2. Oxygen- Release of energy from sugar, 3. Hydrogen- Water formation, 4. Nitrogen- Chlorophyll, Amino Acids and Proteins synthesis, 5. Phosphorus- Vital for photosynthesis and growth, 6. Potassium- Enzyme activity , 7. Calcium-

50

Cell growth, cell division and the components of cell wall, 8. Magnesium-Component of chlorophyll, enzyme activation, 9. Sulphur- Formation of Amino Acids and Proteins.

B) Micro- nutrients 10. Iron- Used in Photosynthesis, 11. Boron- Vital for reproduction, 12. Chlorine- Helps root growth, 13. Copper- Enzyme activation, 14. Manganese- Component of chlorophyll, Enzyme activation, 15. Zinc- Component of enzymes and auxins, 16. Molybdenum- Nitrogen fixation, 17. Cobalt- Nitrogen fixation. Other elements like Sodium- Vital for water movement, Nickel- Nitrogen liberation, Silicon- Cell wall toughness, can also be used.

Nutrient solution6 Most herbs grow well with a basic nutrient solution. Many readymade choices are available. Care must be taken to avoid minor nutrient deficiencies. Several different herbs may be grown in a single nutrient solution. The E.C. (electrical conductivity) of this formula should be approximately 2.5 and the pH adjusted to 5.5 - 6.5. If the day length is below 11 hours, the E.C. should be increased to 3.0-3.6, but the concentration of nitrogen kept at 210 ppm. Under these conditions, a smaller root system develops and more energy is available for shoot (vegetative) growth. The higher E.C. ensures adequate nutrition even with a smaller root system. Following seeding or root cuttings, the first watering should be with a half-strength nutrient solution, pH 5.8; however, the phosphorous concentration should be maintained at 80 ppm. Following germination, or after the first root initiate on the cuttings, the full strength nutrient solution should be used.

Water As a general rule, all water suitable to drink or used to irrigate greenhouses is ideal for hydroponics. To be more precise, water suitable for hydroponics should have conductivity less than 500 uS/cm, or a total salt concentration less than 350 ppm. Harmful amounts of sodium and boron can cause problems in some areas. Very soft water should be used with calcium- containing nutrients.

Light Areas that already get sunlight will need fewer hydroponic lights than a hydroponic garden grown in a fully enclosed room. Remember that sunlight is less predictable than artificial lighting. If greenhouse is used to grow hydroponic garden, it won't need much artificial light during the spring and summer. Expect to supplement the sun with hydroponic to wane. Indoor growers often rely almost completely on artificial light, since limited amounts of sunlight gets to their plants.

LED (Light Emitting Diode) Grow Lights for Hydroponic Gardens8 Glow lights are becoming very popular for hydroponic gardening due to cost of maintenance. The technology of LED grow lights is to emit only the color spectrum required for the plant photosynthesis. Hence, they consume less amount of electricity in comparison to the traditional

51

lighting system and other grow lights. On an average, a LED grow light consumes less than 5 watts of power for operation. In LED grow lights, wide-spectrum red light and narrow-spectrum blue light of specific wavelengths are configured in a particular manner. The red spectrum supplements natural sun rays, whereas the blue spectrum makes an ideal light for the plant growth. Thus, LED grow lights provide ideal light conditions for the better growth of all types of plants and/or crops. In addition, this lighting system contains no toxic mercury, which is used in fluorescent lights and metallic vapour. Another advantage of LED grow lights is the less production of heat. With minimum heat production, water requirement also reduces due to less evaporation. The problem of high temperature root damage and plant dehydration is thus solved by using LED grow lights. Hence, with this lighting system, there is no need for installation of fans or cooling ducts. As these grow lights are available readily with plugs, no ballast is required for the initiation and regulation of the lights. Thus, there is no problem for ballast burning and/or replacement, which is so in case of fluorescent bulbs. LED grow lights are long- lasting; a superior quality may last for 10-12 years. Overall, LED grow lights are easier to maintain and cheaper than other lighting systems used for hydroponic gardening.

Primary among the dissolved cations (positively charged ions) are Ca2+ (calcium), (magnesium), and (potassium); the major nutrient anions in nutrient solutions are (nitrate), (sulphate), and (dihydrogen phosphate).

Numerous 'recipes' for hydroponic solutions are available. Many use different combinations of chemicals to reach similar total final compositions. Commonly used chemicals for the macronutrients include potassium nitrate, calcium nitrate, potassium phosphate, and magnesium sulphate. Various micronutrients are typically added to hydroponic solutions to supply essential elements; among them are Fe (iron), Mn (manganese), Cu (copper), Zn (zinc), B (boron), Cl (chlorine), and Ni (nickel). Chelating agents are sometimes used to keep Fe soluble, and humid acid can be added to increase nutrient uptake.9 Many variations of the nutrient solutions used by Arnon and Hoagland have been styled 'modified Hoagland solutions' and are widely used. Variation of different mixes throughout the plant life cycle further optimizes its nutritional value.10 Plants will change the composition of the nutrient solutions upon contact by depleting specific nutrients more rapidly than others, removing water from the solution, and altering the pH by excretion of either acidity or alkalinity.11 Care is required not to allow salt concentrations to become too high, nutrients to become too depleted, or pH to wander far from the desired value. Although pre-mixed concentrated nutrient solutions are generally purchased from commercial nutrient manufacturers by hydroponic hobbyists and small commercial growers, several tools exists to help anyone prepare their own solutions without extensive knowledge about chemistry. The free and open source tools Hydro Buddy12 and Hydro Cal13 have been created by professional chemists to help any hydroponics grower prepare their own nutrient solutions. The first program is available for Windows, Mac and Linux while the second one can be used through a simple Java interface. Both programs allow for basic nutrient solution preparation although Hydro Buddy provides added functionality to use and save custom substances, save

52

formulations and predict electrical conductivity values. According to Kumar and Cho (2014) the hydroponics waste nutrient solution can be reused for growing commercially important crops and reuse of waste nutrient solution may control point source pollution.14 The well-oxygenated and enlightened environment promotes the development of algae. It is therefore necessary to wrap the tank with black film obscuring all light. Organic hydroponics uses the solution containing microorganisms. In organic hydroponics, organic fertilizer can be added in the hydroponic solution because microorganisms degrade organic fertilizer into inorganic nutrients. In contrast, conventional hydroponics cannot use organic fertilizer because organic compounds in the hydroponic solution show phytotoxic effects.

Advantages Most hydroponically grown produce cannot be sold as organic due to the fact that they do not use soil 1 as a growing medium.Hydroponics also saves water; it uses as little as ⁄20 the amount as a regular farm to produce the same amount of food. The water table can be impacted by the water use and run-off of chemicals from farms, but hydroponics may minimize impact as well as having the advantage that water use and water returns are easier to measure. This can save the farmer money by allowing reduced water use and the ability to measure consequences to the land around a farm. To increase plant growth, lighting systems such as metal-halide lamp for growing stage only or high - pressure sodium for growing/flowering/blooming stage are used to lengthen the day or to supplement natural sunshine if it is scarce. Metal halide emits more light in the blue spectrum, making it ideal for plant growth but is harmful to unprotected skin and can cause skin cancer. High-pressure sodium emits more light in the red spectrum, meaning that it is best suited for supplementing natural sunshine and can be used throughout the growing cycle. However, these lighting systems require large amounts of electricity to operate, making efficiency and safety very critical. The environment in a hydroponics greenhouse is tightly controlled for maximum efficiency, and this new mind-set is called soil-less/controlled-environment agriculture (CEA). With this growers can make ultra- premium foods anywhere in the world, regardless of temperature and growing seasons. Growers monitor the temperature, humidity, andpH level constantly. Hydroponics has been used to enhance vegetables to provide more nutritional value. A hydroponic farmer in Virginia has developed calcium and potassium enriched head of lettuce, scheduled to be widely available in April 2007. Grocers in test markets have said that the lettuce sells "very well", and the farmers claim that their hydroponic lettuce uses 90% less water than traditional soil farming.15 Future trends Rapidly reducing agricultural lands, decrease in the quality and quantity of the food crops and medicinal herbs yield due to poor agricultural practice with the use of artificial fertilizers, pollution of ground water reserve by the plastic and chemical contaminants from various sources, increasing global population, increasing global demand for the good quality medicinal plants in large bulk and the rapidly progressing technology may develop a trend to depend on this hydroponic technique for the agriculture in the future.

53

Conclusions The great thing about hydroponics growing is that anyone can do it. If you have the knowledge and the right equipment you can do it yourself out of your home. This means that individuals that live in downtown areas and have no yard space for a garden can grow vegetables and fruits and herbs without having to trudge down to the grocery every day. The equipment to grow plants using a hydroponics system is easy to obtain and can be easily picked up at a local store or over the internet. As previously stated, the land that we have here on earth is a valuable but rapidly depleting resource. There is no way to recover more once we use all of it up. The only answer to this is to learn alternate methods to do things that take up the majority of our usable land. Farming is that thing and hydroponics is a way to cure the problem. Hydroponics is popular not just as a way to produce larger, healthier, and more flavourful foods on a large scale, but also as a household hobby. Simple hydroponic systems can help people grow herbs, flowers, or vegetables in their basement, in a large closet or even on their kitchen counter. Many people look to hydroponics as the way the most food may be grown in the future.

References 1. George pattenson, A Brief History of Hydroponics, http://ezinearticles.com. (Last cited on 2010 Dec 28). 2. www.Grodan.com (Last cited on 2010 Dec 28). 3. Noucitta kehdi, Hydroponics and medicinal plant our research, [email protected]. (last cited on 2010 Dec 28) 4. Keith Roberto, How to Hydroponics, 4th edition, The Future garden press, 59, (2003). hydroponics, Easy gardening, Students and home hobbyists, (3-34). 5. S. Wan, P.V. Coveney, J. R. Soc. Interface, 8, (2011),1114. 6. Myron L company, Application bulletin Hydroponics, 1-2, (2008). 7. Wade.L.Berry and Sharon Knight, Plant culture in Hydroponics, 119-13. 8. www.Buzzle.com. (Last cited on 2010 Dec28). 9. Fabrizio Adani, Pierluigi Genevini, Patrizia Zaccheo, Graziano Zocchi. Journal of Plant Nutrition Vol. 21, Iss. 3, 1998. 10. Coston, D.C., G.W. Krewer, R.C. Owing and E.G. Denny (1983). Air Rooting of Peach Semihardwood Cutting." HortScience 18(3): 323. 11. Understanding pH Dutch Master Hydroponics 12. Hydro Buddy: An Open Source Multi-Platform Hydroponic Nutrient Calculator 13. Hydro Cal : A Java Hydroponic Nutrient Calculator 14. RR Kumar and JY Cho (2014) Reuse of hydroponic waste solution.

15. Murphy, Katie. "Farm Grows Hydroponic Lettuce." The Observer 1 December 2006.

54

10

ROLE OF PHYTOESTROGENS IN THE TREATMENT OF VARIOUS ESTROGEN RELATED DISORDERS

JAYA PANDEYA, AVIDHAKULSHRESTHAA, NIDHISINGHA, RUCHIRUPANWALA AND D K AWASTHI

ADEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY, UP,

LUCKNOW

BDEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, J.N.(PG) COLLEGE, LUCKNOW

Phytoestrogens have long had a role in the treatment of various disorders. A plant phytoestrogen is supposed to enhance contraception. Studies have suggested a protective role for phytoestrogens against several types of cancer, including breast,uterine, and prostate.

Many phytoestrogens with mixed estrogen agonist and antagonist properties have been identified. Isoflavonoids are a class of flavonoids derived from soybean-based foods. Two dietary isoflavonoids, genistein and daidzein, have estrogenlike activity.

A wide variety of commonly consumed foods contain appreciable amounts of different phytoestrogens. Phytoestrogens consist of at least 20 compounds from 300 plants and are found in such common foods as parsley, garlic, soybeans, wheat, rice, dates, pomegranates, cherries, and coffee. In general, they are weaker than natural estrogens health benefits of phytoestrogens in relation to cardiovascular diseases, cancer, osteoporosis and menopausal symptoms.In recent years, scientists have turned to various phytoestrogens to explain some of the health benefits associated with diets rich in fruits and vegetables. Diets rich in flavonoid-containing foods are sometimes associated with cancer, neurodegenerative and cardiovascular disease prevention. However, it is not yet clear whether the flavonoids themselves are responsible. Therapeutic potential of Estrogens

Benefits Standard dose Hormone replacement. 35-50% in Cardiac Disease* Cardiovascular 15% LDL (lousy cholesterol) 5-15% HDL (healthy cholesterol) Proven Fractures Vertebral fractures: 50%-80% Osteoporosis Hip, wrist and other fractures : 25% 5%-8% BMD spine/hip

55

Menopausal hot flashes, night sweats, vaginal drying and painful intercourse, mood Symptoms swings and skin wrinkles&tone

Alzheimer's Disease Studies indicate positive affects on memory Risks Breast Cancer In some studies with 8-10 yrs of standard dose estrogen , relative risk of 1.25 Breast Tenderness Rare, usually limited to first few months of therapy Cyclic regime declining menses Vaginal Bleeding Daily regime beyond 9-10 months of therapy there should be no bleeding

Herbs have traditionally been used for treating various health problems, and many herbs contain estrogen receptor-binding properties; the most common are soy,licorice, red clover, thyme, turmeric, hops, and verbena.Other herbs that may contain progesterone-binding properties include oregano, verbena, turmeric, thyme, red clover and damiana. Estrogen receptor-binding herbal extracts tend to behave as estrogen agonists, similar to estradiol,where as progesterone-binding extracts could be neutral or act as estrogen antagonists.Phytoestrogens namely flavenoids are a diverse group of phytonutrientsfound in almost all fruits and vegetables. Along with carotenoids, they are responsible for the vivid colors in fruits and vegetables. Flavonoids are the largest group of phytonutrients, with more than 6,000 types. Some of the best-known flavonoids are quercetin and kaempferol. Onions, tea, strawberries, kale, grapes, Brussels sprouts, citrus fruit, parsley, and many spices are just a few natural foods rich in flavonoids, according to Louis Premkumar, a professor of pharmacology at Southern Illinois University School of Medicine and author of "Fascinating Facts about Phytonutrients in Spices and Healthy Food" (Xlibris, 2014).

Flavones: These include luteolin and apigenin. Good sources of flavones are celery, parsley, various herbs and hot peppers. Flavones are associated with overall antioxidant benefits and delaying the metabolizing of drugs.

Anthocyanidins: These include malvidin, pelargondin, peoidin and cyanidin. Good sources of anthocyanidins include red, purple and blue berries; pomegranates; plums; red wine; and red and purple grapes. Anthocyanidins are associated with heart health, antioxidant effects and helping with obesity and diabetes prevention.

Flavonones: These include hesperetin, eriodictyol and naringenin. Flavonones are found abundantly in citrus fruits. They are associated with cardiovascular health, relaxation and overall antioxidant and anti- inflammatory activity.

Isoflavones: This subgroup includes genistein, glycitein and daidzein. Isoflavones are highly concentrated in soybeans and soy products, as well as legumes. They are phytoestrogens, meaning that they are chemicals that act like the hormone estrogen. Scientists suspect they may be beneficial in lowering the risk of hormonal cancers, such as breast, endometrial and prostate cancers, though study results are currently mixed. In various studies, isoflavones have sometimes acted as antioxidants and sometimes as oxidants, so their effect on cancer is unclear. They are also being studied as a way to treat menopausal symptoms.

56

Flavonols: This widely distributed subgroup of flavonoids includes quercetin and kaempferol. They are found in onions, leeks, Brussels sprouts, kale, broccoli, tea, berries, beans and apples. Quercetin is an antihistamine associated with helping to relieve hay fever and hives. It is also known for its anti- inflammatory benefits. Kaempferol and other flavonols are associated with powerful anti-inflamatory and antioxidant activities leading to chronic disease prevention.

Flavanols: There are three primary types of flavanols: monomers (more widely known as catechins), dimers and polymers. Flavanols are found in teas, cocoa, grapes, apples, berries, fava beans and red wine. Catechins are especially common in green and white teas, while dimers, which are associated with lowering cholesterol, are found in black tea. Scientists suspect catechins might be useful in aiding chronic fatigue syndrome symptoms. Catechins are also associated with cardiovascular and neurological health.

Benefits of Phytoestrogens

Cardiovascular disease Because of their antioxidant and anti-inflammatory behaviors, phytoestrogenss are associated with cardiovascular disease prevention. They may also improve the quality of blood vessel walls. Several studies have found an association between higher phytoestrogens intake levels and lowered cardiovascular disease risk across various groups, including postmenopausal women, male smokers and middle-age men and women. Various phytoestrogenss, including quercetin, have shown to be effective at preventing platelet aggregation, according to the Linus Pauling Institute. Platelet aggregation is a known component in heart disease because it contributes to forming blood clots that can lead to strokes and other problems.

Cancer prevention The research in this area has produced mixed results. Animal studies have shown positive results when it comes to lung, mouth, stomach, colon, skin and other cancers.Though phytoestrogenss exhibit powerful antioxidant activity, they exist in a relatively low concentration in the bloodstream when compared to antioxidants like vitamin C and vitamin E, according to World’s Healthiest Foods. This may lower their

Type of estrogen Breast Uterine lining Bone Heart Stimulates breast Increases uterine Increase HDL Estrogen Increase bone mass tissues lining Decreases LDL Blocks effects of Increases uterine Tamoxifen estrogen on breast Increase bone mass Decrease LDL lining tissues Blocks effects of Raloxifene No effect on Increases bone estrogen on breast Decrease LDL (Evista) uterine lining mass tissues Blocks effects of Increases bone Phytoestrogens estrogen on breast Uncertain Uncertain mass tissues overall antioxidant power, and thus lessen their cancer-fighting effects.

57

Neurodegenerative disease prevention Phytoestrogens, anti-inflammatory and antioxidant effects may help protect against neurodegenerative diseases like Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s. In animal studies, flavonoid levels have been positively correlated with reduced risk of these diseases, but human studies have yielded inconclusive results. Flavonoids may also increase blood flow to the brain, improving cognitive function, according to World’s Healthiest Foods. A study published in 2007 in the American Journal of Epidemiologyfound that elderly men and women with higher flavonoid intake had better cognitive performance at the start of the study and significantly less age-related cognitive decline over the next 10 years than those with lower flavonoid intake.

Conclusion Overall, assessing an appropriate formulation and dosage of phytoestrogens is difficult, and long-term effects on other target tissues (uterus, heart, brain) remain unknown. Little is known about the actions of phytoestrogens on the uterus, heart, brain, and bone. Although these compounds have recently gained widespread use, optimal dose and potential adverse effects remain unknown. Definitive long- term studies in a controlled clinical setting are necessary to assess efficacy vs risk for the phytoestrogens

New phytoestrogens will be designed to act only on specific parts of the body. "We may want estrogen for maintaining bone health, but don't want the estrogen effect on the uterus. The study is also looking at just how much a diet low in fat and high in fruits, vegetables and grains reduces the risk of breast cancer, colorectal cancer, and heart disease.

"As we better understand the molecular and genetic bases of disease, we will be able to design drugs specifically to correct the defects,"

References

1. Z., Erdogan, John A. Katzenellenbogenet al “Design of pathway preferential estrogens that provide beneficial metabolic and vascular effects without stimulating reproductive tissues” Sci. Signal. 24 May 2016: Vol. 9, Issue 429, pp. ra53 2. October 07, 2011 | Hysterectomy, Sexual HealthBy Judith A. Norris, RNP 3. Tham OM, Gardner CD, Haskell WL. Clinical review 97: potential health benefits of dietary phytoestrogens; a review of the clinical, epidemiological, and mechanistic evidence. J ClinEndocrinolMetab. 1998;83:2223-2235. 4. Murkies AL, Wilcox G, Davis SR. Clinical review 92: phytoestrogens. J ClinEndocrinolMetab. 1998;83:297-303. 5. Hodgson JM, Puddey IB, Beilin LJ, Mori TA, Croft KD. Supplementation with isoflavonoid phytoestrogens does not alter serum lipid concentrations: a randomized controlled trial in humans. J Nutr.1998;128:728-732.

58

6. Maskarinec G, Singh S, Meng L, Franke AA. Dietary soy intake and urinary isoflavone excretion among women from a multiethnic population. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prevo 1998;7:613619. 7. Shoff SM, Newcomb PA, Mares-Perlman JA, et a1. Usual consumption of plant foods containing phytoestrogens and sex hormone levels in postmenopausal women in Wisconsin. Nutr Cancer. 1998;30:207-212. 8. Lees CJ, Ginn TA. Soy protein isolate diet does not prevent increased cortical bone turnover in ovariectomized macaques. CalclfTissue Int. 1998; 62:557-558. 9. Gennari C, Agnusdei 0, Crepaldi G, et a1. Effect of ipriflavone-a synthetic derivative of natural isoflavones--on bone mass loss in the early years after menopause. Menopause. Spring 1998;5:9-15.

11

IMPLEMENTATION OF PROTECTION OF PLANT VARIETIES & FARMERS’ RIGHTS ACT, 2001 P.K. SINGH INDIAN SUGARCANE RESEARCH INSTITUTE, LUCKNOW

Background With its rich plant biodiversity and strong R&D through NARS, India as a member of the World Trade Organization (WTO), became signatory in to the Trade Related Aspects of the Intellectual Property Systems (TRIPS), which provided under Article 27.3(b) that the plant varieties are to be protected either by patents or by an effective sui generis system drawing its essence from UPOV. Based on these provisions, The Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmers’ Rights Act, 2001 was enacted in October, 2001 and the PPV&FR Rules were notified in 2003. Consequently, the Protection of Plant Varieties and Farmer’s Rights Authority was established on 11th November 2005 by the Central Government vide Gazette Notification No. S.O. 1589(E) with the following objectives: 1. To provide an effective system for protection of plant varieties and rights of farmers and plant breeders. 2. To recognize the farmers in respect of their contribution made in conserving, improving and making available plant genetic resources for development of new plant varieties. 3. To protect plant breeders’ rights to stimulate investment for R&D and develop new varieties. 4. To facilitate the growth of seed industry to ensure production and availability of high quality seed/planting material.

The introduction to the Act states that to accelerate agricultural development, it is necessary to protect plant breeders’ rights to stimulate investment for research and development for the development of new plant varieties. Such protection is likely to facilitate the growth of the seed industry which will

59

ensure the availability of high quality seeds and planting material to the farmers. Also, it emphasizes on the recognition and protection of the rights of farmers in respect of their contribution made at any time in conserving, improving and making available plant genetic resources for the development of the new plant varieties. To fulfill the objectives as envisaged in the Act, developmental steps were initiated at different fronts by the PPV&FR Authority, since its establishment in 2005. The beginning of the implementation of an Act, which is a meticulous mix of scientific and legal aspects, was a difficult task and required national level discussions and consensus on various issues. But, the intricate planning, timely completion of tasks and result oriented policies of the Authority, lead to notable achievements in the short period of five years. With the issuance of Registration Certificate to two new varieties and three farmers’ varieties in December 2009, the Authority made a humble beginning which will be recorded in the history of IP protection in India marked by the initiation of an era where Farmers’ have been granted IP rights for their varieties.

Registration Section 29.2 of the Act provides that the Central Government shall by notification in official Gazettes specify the genera and species for the purpose of registration of varieties. So far, Central Government has notified 102 crop species for the purpose of registration. For these crop species PPV&FR Authority has developed “Guidelines for the Conduct of Species Specific Distinctiveness, Uniformity and Stability,” tests or “Specific Guidelines”. The purpose of these Specific Guidelines is to provide detailed practical guidance for the harmonized examination of DUS and, in particular, to identify appropriate characteristics for the examination of DUS and production of harmonized variety descriptions. The notified crop species include bread wheat, rice, maize, sorghum, pearl millet, chickpea, pigeon pea, green gram, black gram, field pea / garden pea, kidney bean / French bean, lentil, diploid cotton (two species), tetraploid cotton (two species), jute (two species), sugarcane, ginger, turmeric, Indian mustard, Karan rai, rapeseed, gobhi sarson, sunflower, safflower, castor, sesame, linseed, groundnut, soybean, black pepper, small cardamom, rose, chrysanthemum, mango, potato, brinjal / eggplant, tomato, okra /lady’s finger, cauliflower, cabbage, onion, garlic, isabgol, durum wheat, dicoccum wheat & other triticum species, coconut, periwinkle, Damask Rose, brahmi, menthol mint and Orchids.

Definitions related to registration As per the PPV&FR Act, 2001, the registration can be granted for different kinds of varieties like New, Extant, EDVs etc. The relevant definitions related to registration are as under: a. Variety: “variety” means a plant grouping except micro-organism within a single botanical taxon of the lowest known rank, which can be - (i) Defined by the expression of the characteristics resulting from a given genotype of that plant grouping; (ii) Distinguished from any other plant grouping by expression of at least one of the said characteristics; and (iii) Considered as a unit with regard to its suitability for being propagated, which remains unchanged after such propagation?

60

and includes propagating material of such variety, extant variety, transgenic variety, farmers’ variety and essentially derived variety. b. Farmer: “farmer” means any person who- (i) Cultivates crops by cultivating the land himself; or (ii) Cultivates crops by directly supervising the cultivation or land through any other person; or (iii) Conserves and preserves, severally or jointly, with any other person any wild species or traditional varieties or adds value to such wild species or traditional varieties through selection and identification of their useful properties; c. Farmers’ Variety: “farmers’ variety” means a variety which - (i) has been traditionally cultivated and evolved by the farmers in their fields; or (ii) is a wild relative or land race or a variety about which the farmers possess the common knowledge. d. Extant Variety: means a variety available in India which is- (i) notified under section 5 of the Seeds Act, 1966 (54 of 1966); or (ii) farmers’ variety; or (iii) A variety about which there is common knowledge; or (iv) Any other variety which is in public domain. e. EDV: “essentially derived variety”, in respect of a variety (the initial variety), shall be said to be essentially derived from such initial variety when it – (i) is predominantly derived from such initial variety, or from a variety that itself is predominantly derived from such initial variety, while retaining the expression of the essential characteristics that results from the genotype or combination of genotypes of such initial variety; (ii) is clearly distinguishable from such initial variety; and (iii) Conforms (except for the differences which result from the act of derivation) to such initial variety in the expression of the essential characteristics that result from the genotype or combination of genotype of such initial variety. f. Variety of Common Knowledge: Under section 20(1) read with section 2(j)(iii) of PPV & FR Act, 2001 that the Registry will process the applications for registration of an extant variety about which there is common knowledge (Section 2(j)(iii) of PPV & FR Act, 2001) if the following conditions are met:- A1. If a variety which is not released and notified under the Seeds Act, 1966 but is well documented through publications and is capable of satisfying the definition of ‘variety’, or A2. The candidate variety should either have an entry in any official register of varieties or in the course of being made, or

61

A3. The candidate variety should find inclusion in a reference collection or is having a precise description in a publication, or A4. By any other means a variety has become a matter of common knowledge. and B. The variety is under cultivation or marketing during the time of filing of application for registration. C. The true representative seed of the variety should be available at the time of filing of application. D. A candidate variety should have been sold or otherwise disposed of in India one year prior to the date of filing of the application and it should not have been sold or otherwise disposed of 13 years prior to the date of filing of application and in case of trees and vines it should not have been sold or otherwise disposed of 16 years prior to the date of filing of application.

g. Essential Characteristics: “essential characteristics” means such heritable traits of a plant variety which are determined by the expression of one or more genes of other heritable determinants that contribute to the principal features, performance or value of the plant variety.

Duration of Registration (i) 18 years for trees and vines, whereas, 15 years for other crops from the date of Registration. (ii) Certificate of registration will be reviewed and renewed after six years for annual crops and nine years for trees/vines on payment of prescribed fees; (iii) For extant varieties notified under Seeds Act, 1966, 15 years from date of notification of that variety by the Central Government under section 5 of the Seeds Act, 1966. (iv) For other extant varieties, 15 years from the date of registration of the variety.

Fees related to registration process Different fees are payable on matters related to the registration, which can be checked from the website of the Authority (www.plantauthority.gov.in). But, for farmers there is NO FEE.

DUS Test Centres Authority is maintaining and funding 42 DUS test Centres for different crops with a mandate of maintaining and multiplication of reference varieties/example varieties and generation of database for DUS descriptors as per DUS guidelines of respective crops. The list of DUS test Centres is available on the official website of the Authority.

Steps for Registration: (i) Application by Breeder/ Farmers with Application and Registration Fees (ii) Internal Scrutiny (PV 1, TQ, NORV, IINDUS) (iii) Application Accepted/Rejected (iv) Seed Deposit (National Gene Bank) + DUS test Fee (v) Publication of minimum passport data in Plant Variety Journal of India

62

(vi) DUS Test for at least Two similar crop seasons (vii) Analysis of Data (viii) Acceptance/Rejection for DUS (ix) Entry in National Plant Variety Register (x) Registration Certificate Granted (xi) Publication in PVJI for submission of claims for benefit sharing

Benefit Sharing, Compensation And Rights Provided Under The Act Benefit Sharing: (i) Section 26 deals with the Benefit Sharing. (ii) The claims under benefit sharing can be submitted by Citizens of India or Firms/ NGOs formed or established in India. (iii) Such claims after due examination and after receiving counter-claims will be disposed by the Authority. (iv) The amount thus determined shall be deposited by the breeder in the manner referred to in clause (a) of sub-section (1) of section 45 in the National Gene Fund.

Rights of Communities in relation to Compensation: (i) Section 41 provides for settlement of any claim attributable to the contribution of the people of that village or local community, in the evolution of any variety registered under this Act. (ii) Compensation to be determined by PPV&FRA and deposited in Gene Fund

Rights of Farmers: Under section 39 of the PPV&FR Act, 2001 farmers’ rights have been given. These are: (i) A new variety bred/developed by farmer will be registered in like manner as a breeder of a variety. (ii) Farmer engaged in conservation of genetic resources of land races and wild relatives of economic plants, improvement through selection and preservation shall be entitled for recognition and reward from Gene Fund provided that the said material has been used as donors of genes in varieties registrable under this Act. (iii) Farmers can save, use, sow, re-sow, exchange, share or sell farm produce including seed of a protected variety but cannot sell branded seed of a variety protected under this Act. (iv) Breeder shall disclose expected performance of the protected variety under given conditions and farmers can claim compensation if variety fails. (v) Sec 42 refers to protection against innocent infringement (vi) Sec 43 refers to authorization required for EDV developed from farmers’ variety (vii) Sec 44 provides that farmers are exempted for payment of any fee for any proceeding/ application/ DUS Test. Researchers’ Rights Section 30 states that nothing contained in this Act shall prevent-

63

(i) The use of any variety registered under this Act by any person using such variety for conducting experiment or research (ii) The use of a variety as an initial source of variety for the purpose of creating of other varieties: Provided that the authorization of the breeder of a registered variety is required where the repeated use of such variety as a parental line is necessary for commercial production of such other newly developed variety.

Breeders’ Rights: (i) Breeder shall be required to deposit seeds or propagating material including parental line seeds of registered varieties in the National Gene Bank (Sec 27). (ii) A certificate of registration for a variety issued under this Act shall confer an exclusive right on the breeder or his successor, his agent or licensee, to produce, sell, market, distribute, import or export the variety [Sec 28(1)] (iii) Breeders can appoint agent/licensee and can opt for civil remedy in case of infringement of his rights.

Compulsory Licensing (Sec 47): (i) After the expiry of 3 years of issue of certificate of registration , any person can appeal on ground of inadequate seed supply/ not reasonable price from the breeder to undertake production, distribution and sale of seed (ii) Authority will hear both parties and in public interest, may order breeder to grant a license to the applicant on payment of a fee (iii) Period of compulsory license will be maximum up to period of protection (iv) Authority can settle terms and conditions, revoke or modify compulsory license

Infringements Under section 64 of the PPV&FR Act, a right established under this Act is infringed by a person – (i) who, not being the breeder of a variety registered under this Act or a registered agent or a registered licensee of that variety, sells, exports, imports or produces such variety without the permission of its breeder or within the scope of a registered licence or registered agency without permission of the registered licensee or registered agent, as the case may be; (ii) who uses, sells, exports, imports or produces any other variety giving such variety, the denomination identical with or deceptively similar to the denomination of a variety registered under this Act in such manner as to cause confusion in the mind of general people in identifying such variety so registered.

Further section 65 of the Act provides that the suit for the infringement of a variety registered under this Act or relating to any right in a variety registered under this Act, should not be instituted in any court inferior to a District Court having jurisdiction to try the suit, where, “District Court having jurisdiction” shall mean the District Court within the local limits of whose jurisdiction the cause of action arises.

64

Thus, the cases of infringements are not supposed to be dealt by the Authority, until or unless referred to by the concerned courts for any scientific opinion.

National Gene Bank Section 19 of the PPV&FR Act provides that DUS (Distinctiveness, Uniformity and Stability) test should be conducted once proper seed and DUS test fee has been deposited by the applicant. Rule 29(10) prescribes that seeds or propagules and parental lines of varieties under registration submitted for DUS test and special tests should be deposited at the National Gene Bank of PPV&FRA. Section 27 provides that the applicant/breeder should deposit seeds/propagating material including parental lines of hybrids of registered variety in the National Gene Bank of PPV&FRA. Thus, the PPV&FR Authority established its National Gene Bank at Delhi to handle the orthodox or true seeds of the varieties of crop species notified for registration. Further, to take care of the tree/vines/ other vegetatively propagated crop species, five Field Gene Banks are under establishment at different locations depending upon the agro- climatic regions. These Gene Banks have following major purposes: (i) To act as repository of the seed or propagules during the process of registration (ii) To provide the true reference sample of the registered varieties for any future use.

12

THE IMPACT OF SCIENCE ON SOCIETY JAHAN ARA Department of Education, Karmat Hussain Muslim Girls P.G College Lucknow Abstract Scientific and technological activities refers to the elucidation of unknown phenomena, and to the creation of new knowledge through the discovery of new natural laws and principles, and the new knowledge obtained is then utilized in the real society. The essence of how science and technology contributes to society is the creation of new knowledge, and then utilization of that knowledge to boost the prosperity of human lives, and to solve the various issues facing society. With the shift to a knowledge-based society well underway in the opening years of the 21st century, the creation of new knowledge is an increasingly important aspect of scientific and technological activities, and the role of science in this knowledge creation is important for the realization of “science and technology for society.” The relationship between science and technology and society, can be described by the example of rain falling on a mountain. Rain that has fallen on a mountain does not immediately wash away downhill. First, it is captured and stored by forests, giving life to trees and other vegetation and creating a verdant landscape.

Introduction This can be compared to the accumulation of scientific knowledge and the continuing search for truth, obtained through basic research, and perhaps demonstrates that science has intrinsic value in itself. Meanwhile, the rainwater stored in the forest bubbles out from springs and flows downhill in a steadily

65

widening stream. A single stream flow can separate into a large number of sub-flows, and sometimes the flow can go underground into a subterranean network. This situation can be compared to the diversity of research and development that can arise based on scientific knowledge, leading to the planting of various new technological seeds. Eventually, the river reaches farming communities and urban cities, where it is utilized for drinking water and other household purposes, for agricultural or industrial uses, and for various other needs, universally benefiting all aspects of society. This is equivalent to research and development resulting in practical technologies that boost the prosperity of the people’s society and lives, and to the utilization of science and technology in response to various issues facing society. If the forest fails to capture a sufficient amount of the falling rain, society will quickly be faced with drought and people will not be able to live. In the same way, realization of societal progress through science and technology requires a sufficient accumulation of scientific knowledge. In other words, science can be considered to be the foundation strength of society. However, this foundation strength is not something that can be acquired in a single day or night, but instead requires a steady, continuous build-up.

Scientific integrity and social benefits in new social and institutional contexts Science is also a social activity. To be a scientist is to be a certain kind of professional, and not simply to be the producer of a certain kind of knowledge. Therefore changes in the social or institutional context within which science is conducted have consequences for science. Many of the significant changes that have occurred in recent decades are a consequence of the considerable expansion of student numbers along with forms of globalization that have combined to erode traditional academic communities and selfunderstandings. It has also undermined the historically constituted basis of scientific integrity. The challenge is that any global standard of integrity now needs to incorporate a greater diversity of cultural practices and value systems than in the past. Expansion and globalization have also coincided with growing commercial pressures, due to the movement towards privatization, greater pressure to rank and to evaluate researchers and institutions, public funding retrenchment in higher education and research, and the high profitability expectations associated with cutting-edge development (for example, nanotechnology, biotechnology). One practical consequence has been a tendency towards contractualization of scientific research, with conditions attached that may conflict with traditional principles of open access and public benefit. Furthermore, it can be highly tempting, especially in the context of international cooperation, to engage in what has been termed “ethical dumping”, i.e. locating research deliberately in the jurisdictions where the lowest ethical standards apply, notably with regard to informed consent on the part of subjects and stakeholders5 or to environmental risks assessment. In so far as privatization may be one aspect of contractualization, the question remains whether mechanisms for implementation of ethical principles can apply in the same way to privately funded research. It is at least conceivable, therefore, that current modes of institutional organization of science, including such features as large-scale cooperation, capital-intensive “big science”, confidentiality requirements and evaluation-driven pressures on scientists, might tend to erode ethical standards. They certainly make it unrealistic to regard ethical science as something that can be achieved through, or even defined in terms of, purely individual attitudes and behaviour. It is under discussion whether the frequency and severity of scientific research misconduct – fabrication, falsification and plagiarism – and

66

of questionable research practices have increased. The problems are certainly more extensively studied and investigated. Further research is undoubtedly needed to improve knowledge not just of the nature and frequency of misconduct but also of the social and institutional conditions that encourage or discourage ethical conduct in science. Finally, new expectations addressed to science point towards the need for a more expansive conception of science ethics. One example is heightened expectations in connection with environmental issues, with respect to which science is called upon both to enable societies to understand the threats they face and to provide tools to counter such threats and to minimize their impact. These issues are of particular significance in developing countries, the territories of which include a large proportion of the natural goods (fauna, flora and mineral resources). From an ethical perspective, the much-discussed precautionary principle is exemplary of this new context. 6 Broader conceptions of risk and uncertainty are current within contemporary societies and create challenges not just for the predictive capacity of science but also for its ability to maintain public trust. While there is general agreement that science should take responsibility for its unintended consequences and contribute to sustainable development via the capacity of humankind to deal with ever more complex and long-range causal chains, specific responsibilities of scientists or scientific institutions in this regard are questioned. Science and technology are also expected to contribute to the achievement of key social goals and values still connected to the idea of “progress”. However, their content has undoubtedly changed, first because progress is no longer taken for granted as an outcome of scientific endeavour, and secondly because the goals and values at stake are increasingly diverse, and perhaps contested. A particularly important area of debate is the relation between science and the economy. Concern that science stands in excessively close connection to economic values leads to questions about the ethically desirable relation between science and human values. In this respect, ethical issues in relation to science are closely connected to broader social issues about equity and inclusion. The trends described above have several potentially damaging implications, which may need to be counteracted by specific response measures. Scientists may have limited control over their own intellectual agendas, which are set more and more by the priorities of external funding agencies. Similarly, scientists everywhere may be hampered in pursuing research that does not fit into currently fashionable directions, whether defined thematically or in terms of scale and scope. “Big science” is indispensable in certain areas; it may be much less relevant in others. Finally, as noted above, the way in which research careers are evaluated is highly significant for the way in which science is actually done, and may bias intellectual activity in a number of ways. II.3 Tensions between private and public interests A primarily public conception of science has long been dominant and has shaped science institutions in most countries. In this conception, of which the influential 1947 report Science: the Endless Frontier by Vannevar Bush was one powerful statement, the state has a leading role in setting priorities, in channelling funding and in establishing institutions to enable the internal dynamic of science to flourish. In playing its role, the state can also ensure that large-scale public projects of strategic importance are effectively implemented and their social benefits harnessed. The scientific institutions that emerged in the mid-20th century in most countries, including developing countries after independence, followed a similar generic pattern. The role of the private sector followed the same template and was based on similar epistemological and organizational principles. The major role of corporations such as IBM, Bell and Xerox in funding high-quality basic research is well-known. In the last 30 years, this framing conception of science, along with the institutions and social representations attendant on it, has been

67

profoundly transformed. Henceforth, in a context of relative public retrenchment, private corporations have a major role, in science as in other areas, in shaping processes, institutions and outcomes that may be inadequately regulated. In addition, the shifting balance between public and private funding – which is just one dimension of the change – has consequences for the institutional organization of research and for the status of researchers that require both better empirical assessment and enhanced ethical reflection. Among issues that might deserve detailed consideration in this regard are the freedom and autonomy of researchers; their employment rights, in particular at doctoral and postdoctoral level; the implications of project funding; and the consequences of competition between institutions, notably through rankings. II.4 Divisive globalization Science does not function in isolation from other global trends that are tending to reconfigure and in some respects sharpen inequalities. A challenge for ethical thinking is thus to interpret general principles in light of social settings that hamper equitable benefit sharing. In addition, in practice, the ethical framework for science does face other challenges of implementation in developed countries. Yet it is equally important to consider the status of researchers in the developing world. It is important to emphasize, furthermore, that global divides do not operate just between countries, but also at the global level between a range of different actors, issue areas and processes.

Conclusions The list, and the comments below, may serve as a reminder of the complexity of the issues under consideration: a. geographical divides (the most familiar and obvious, although it is equally true that the geography of science has changed considerably over the past 20 years); b. capacity divides, including between institutions in the same country; c. unequal degrees of internationalization of knowledge production across disciplines and knowledge areas; d. disciplinary divides, in a context where significant moves towards transdisciplinary science are in evidence in certain areas; e. the divide between mainstream and alternative approaches; f. divides produced by the increasingly competitive nature of research, embedded in new management practices; g. Divides between academics, policy-makers and society, which are among other things linguistic in nature.

References 1. Pinch, T. F. and W. E. Bijker. “The Social Construction of Facts and Artifacts: Or How the Sociology of Science and the Sociology of Technology Might Benefit Each Other.” In The Social Construction of Technological Systems, edited by W. Bijker, T. Hughes, and T. Pinch, 11-44. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1987. 2. Royal Society and the Royal Academy of Engineering. “Nanoscience and Nanotechnologies: Opportunities and Uncertainties.” London: Royal Society, 2004 3. Saviotti, P. P. “On the co-evolution of technologies and institutions,” in Towards Environmental Innovation Systems, edited by K. Weber and J. Hemmelskamp, 9- 32. Berlin: Springer, 2005.

68

4. Building Sustainable Societies: A Blueprint for a Post-Industrial World By Dennis Pirages Contributor Dennis Pirages Published by M.E. Sharpe, 1996 ISBN 1563247399, 9781563247392 361 pages 5. Disability and Development In Kosovo: The Case For Community Based Rehabilitation Majid 6. Thomas Princen’s The Logic of Sufficiency http://www.amazon.com/Logic-Sufficiency-Thomas Princen/dp/ 7. Valuing the Earth: Economics, Ecology, Ethics By Herman E. Daly, Kenneth N. Townsend Contributor Herman E. Daly, Kenneth N. Townsend Published by MIT Press, 1993 ISBN 0262540681, 9780262540681

13

ROLE OF HON’BLE NATIONAL GREEN TRIBUNAL (NGT) IN PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT DEEPTI SINGH DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS, MAHILA VIDYALAYA P.G. COLLEGE, LUCKNOW – 226018

The National Green Tribunal has been established on 18.10.2010 under the National Green Tribunal Act 2010 for effective and expeditious disposal of cases relating to environmental protection and conservation of forests and other natural resources including enforcement of any legal right relating to environment and giving relief and compensation for damages to persons and property and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto. It is a specialized body equipped with the necessary expertise to handle environmental disputes involving multi-disciplinary issues. The Tribunal shall not be bound by the procedure laid down under the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, but shall be guided by principles of natural justice. The Tribunal's dedicated jurisdiction in environmental matters shall provide speedy environmental justice and help reduce the burden of litigation in the higher courts. The Tribunal is mandated to make and endeavor for disposal of applications or appeals finally within 6 months of filing of the same. Initially, the NGT is proposed to be set up at five places of sittings and will follow circuit procedure for making itself more accessible. New Delhi is the Principal Place of Sitting of the Tribunal and Bhopal, Pune, Kolkata and Chennai shall be the other four place of sitting of the Tribunal. Though many Government organizations and agencies are engaged in protection of Environment but some where there was a feeling that the work was not reflected upto root level to provide relief to the people in general. The role of Hon’ble NGT has been very effective in this aspect for the last two years. People in general have found an effective platform through which they have been able, to show their concern regarding Environmental issues, through PIL / O.A. . Hon’ble NGT has considered these genuine O.A.s and came out with best solutions by issuing directions to various Govt. organizations, which in response came out with best possible responses along with time bound action plans.

69

Land mark judgments in which Hon’ble NGT was able to bring out best possible solutions along with heavy penalty to responsible stack holders wherever applicable are as following:- S.N. Case / Oa No Summary Of Judgment

1 200/2014 MC MEHTA Vs UOI Matter relates to keeping River Ganga clean from its origin at Gaumukh in Uttarakhand to its final confluence in Bay Of Bengal in west Bengal. Detail time bound action plan in phased manner, from Urban development , Jal Nigam, Irrigation dept., Pollution control board, industry department, water resource dept, MoEf and NMCG are being obtained. Government has submitted various plans consisting of tapping & interception of drains meeting Ganga river and its tributaries and installation of STP, CETP as per the quality of drain water qulity, making it mandatory for industries to adopt ZLD with web camera or install ETP with online Effluent quality monitoring system along with treated water recycling system. Hotels and Dharamsala along the bank of river were directed to install STP with treated water recycling system, banning of use of polythene, maintaining minimum flow of river etc. The case is being heard regularly.

2 102/2014 Sand Plast(India) Matter relates to utilization of fly ash generated from ltd& ors Vs UOI Coal & lignite based Thermal Power Plants. In compliance of Hon’ble NGT orders Govt. of UP has made a inter departmental committee to monitor generation & utilization of fly ash. PWD has been made nodal department for monitoring effective use of fly ash and fly ash based products in government construction works.

3 21/2014 Vadhaman Kaushik Matter relates to improvement of air quality in NCR Vs UOI region. In compliance of Hon’ble NGT orders action plan has been prepared consisting of role of different Govt. department. Action plan consist of smooth movement of traffic, use of clean fuel, encouraging mass transport like Metro and CNG buses, Strict compliance of pollution norms by industries, Prohibition of garbage and staple burning, safe

70

disposal of MSW, un-interrupted power supply, use of silent generators, smooth roads etc.

4 36/2012 Rajiv Narayan& ors Matter relates to industrial pollution caused by Vs UOI various industries. In compliance of Hon’ble NGT orders some industries were heavily fined to compensate for environment pollution caused by them. The collected amount of penalty was being utilized for restoration of environment quality of that region. The industries were directed to adopt cleaner technology along with latest pollution control devices & online monitoring arrangements.

5 Ashwini kumar dubey Vs UOI Matter relates to industrial pollution caused by and Jagat Narayan Viskarma various industries in singrauli Sonbhadra. In Vs UOI compliance of Hon’ble NGT orders Core committees of different department and educational institutes like IIT were constituted. The industries were directed to implement action plan as per recommendation of Core Committee. All the industries have upgraded pollution control system and installed online effluent and emission monitoring system. The industries have also made provision for clean RO water supply to nearby villagers.

These are some of the illustrations where Hon’ble NGT has helped in improving environment quality and helping the people residing in the area by mobilizing government agencies and penalizing the defaulters on the polluter pays principal.

71

14

PREDICTION OF ANTAGONISTIC ACTIVITY OF Β-CARBOLINE AND ITS DERIVATIVES USING TOPOLOGICAL DESCRIPTORS

ANIL KUMAR SONI1*, SANGEETA SAHU2, PRATIBHA SINGH3 AND VISHNU KUMAR SAHU4 1DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, SHIA P.G. COLLEGE, LUCKNOW-226020 (U.P.), INDIA. 2DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, UNIVERSITY OF LUCKNOW, LUCKNOW-226007 (U.P.), INDIA. 3DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, K.S. SAKET P.G. COLLEGE, AYODHYA-FAIZABAD-224001 (U.P.) 4DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, MAHARANI LAL KUNWARI P.G. COLLEGE, BALRAMPUR (U.P.)

Abstract Prediction of antagonistic activity of β–carboline and its thirteen derivatives has been made using topological descriptors viz, connectivity index and kappa shape index of different orders. For evaluation of values of descriptor, molecular modeling and geometry optimization of all the compounds were carried out with CAChe Pro software by opting semiempirical PM3 method using MOPAC 2002. For prediction of activity multiple linear regression analysis (MLR) was performed. MLR analysis has been made by Project Leader Software associated with CAChe by using the above descriptors as independent variables and biological activity as dependent variables. We were performed leave-one-out method and the result reflected a direct relationship between biological activity and connectivity index of zero order, while indirect relationship with connectivity index of second order and, connectivity index is a reliable descriptor to predict biological activity of β–carboline and its various derivatives. Key words: β–carboline, antagonistic activity, connectivity index and kappa shape index, PM3

Introduction In our previous work, predication of binding affinities of β–carbolines was made by using quantum chemical parameters and spectroscopic data.1,2 In this work we have predicted the binding affinities of fourteen β–carbolines using topological descriptors. The topological indices are molecular connectivity indices and shape index. Molecular connectivity3-8 is a method of molecular structure quantization in which weight counts of substructure fragments are incorporated into numerical indices such as size, branching, unsaturation, hetero atom content and cyclicity which are encoded. Substructures for molecular skeleton are defined by the decomposition of the skeleton into fragments of atom (zero order, m=0) and one bond paths (first order, m=1). The calculation of indices begins with the reduction of the molecule to hydrogen-subpressed skeleton. Our study is based on following topological descriptors: 0 1. Connectivity index of zero order ( χt) 1 2. Connectivity index of first order ( χt) 2 3. Connectivity index of second order ( χt) 0 v 4. Valence connectivity index of zero ( χt ) 1 v 5. Valence connectivity index of first order ( χt ) 2 v 6. Valence connectivity index of second order ( χt )

72

7. Kappa shape index for first order (1K) 8. Kappa shape index for second order (2K) 9. Kappa shape index for third order (3K) The evaluation of above topological parameters is given as below. The molecular connectivity indices m are symbolized by t . The connectivity index is given by eqn-1 Ns mm ti  C (Eqn.1) i1 m and Ci is given by eqn-2 m1 m 0.5 Cik  () (Eqn.2) k 1 where m = 1 for first order, m = 2 for second order and m = 3 for third order. Similarly the valence connectivity index is given by eqn-3

73

9-11 Table 1. IC50 antagonistic activity of β-Carboline and its thirteen derivative binding to benzodiazepines receptor S.No. OBA S.No. OBA

1 5.79 8 4.60

2 5.40 9 8.10

3 6.91 10 8.30

4 7.62 11 9.05

5 7.96 12 9.30

6 7.35 13 8.64

7 6.9 14 9.00

74

Ns m V m V ti  C (Eqn.3) i1

mV and Ci is given by eqn-4 m1 m V V 0.5 Cik () (Eqn.4) k 1 Where m = 1 for first order, m = 2 for second order and m = 3 for third order. Kappa shape indices are also a method of molecular structure quantization in which attributes of molecular shape are encoded into kappa values ( 1 K for first order, 2 K for second order, 3 K for third order). The first, second and third order kappa shape indices are given by equ-5, 6, 7 and8 2 1 AA( 1) K  12 (Eqn.5) ()Pi 2 2 (AA 1)( 2) K  22 (Eqn.6) ()Pi 2 3 (AA 1)( 3) K  32 if A is odd (Eqn.7) ()Pi 2 3 (AA 3)( 2) K  32 if A is even (Eqn.8) ()Pi

where Pi is length of paths of bond length ‘i’ in the hydrogen suppressed molecule and ‘A’ is the number of non-hydrogen atoms in the molecule.

75

Table 2. Values of topological descriptors, observed biological activity and predicted biological activity Descriptors S.No. 0 1 2 0 v 1 v 2 v 1 2 3 OBA PA χt χt χt χt χt χt K K K 1 8.673 6.449 5.652 6.989 4.254 3.092 8.32 3.293 1.333 5.79 6.462 2 9.544 6.843 6.286 7.359 4.399 3.259 9.242 3.539 1.547 5.40 6.103 3 10.251 7.381 6.455 8.32 4.788 3.443 10.173 4.108 1.744 6.91 7.142 4 10.958 7.881 6.836 9.027 5.375 3.672 11.111 4.704 2.08 7.62 7.368 5 11.665 8.381 7.189 9.734 5.875 4.087 12.055 5.325 2.42 7.96 7.697 6 9.544 6.843 6.286 8.045 4.742 3.61 9.242 3.539 1.547 7.35 6.103 7 11.121 7.754 7.185 8.175 4.764 3.516 11.111 4.349 1.966 6.90 6.413 8 9.544 6.843 6.286 7.489 4.464 3.325 9.242 3.539 1.547 4.60 6.103 9 10.958 7.881 6.836 9.083 5.235 3.644 11.111 4.704 2.08 8.10 7.368 10 11.828 8.292 7.327 9.228 5.242 3.777 12.055 4.938 2.172 8.30 7.558 11 15.69 10.651 9.375 12.343 6.937 4.882 16.844 7.266 3.299 9.05 8.905 12 16.397 11.189 9.544 13.304 7.325 5.064 17.811 7.92 3.52 9.30 9.944 a13 17.104 11.689 9.925 14.011 7.913 5.293 18.781 8.59 3.908 8.64 10.169 14 20.924 14.707 12.571 17.105 9.97 6.944 23.168 11.228 5.507 9.00 9.116 a 0 1 data point not used in deriving the equation. Where χt = connectivity index of zero order, χt = connectivity index 2 0 v 1 v of first order, χt = connectivity index of second order, χt = valence connectivity index of zero, χt = valence 2 v 1 connectivity index of first order, χt = valence connectivity index of second order, K = kappa shape index for first order, 2K = kappa shape index for second order, 3K = kappa shape index for third order, OBA = observed biological activity in term of IC50 antagonistic activity and PBA= predicted biological activity

Materials and Methods: The study materials of this work are β–carboline and its thirteen derivatives as listed in Table 1. The biological activity of these compound were measured by three different methods viz., IC50 inhibition of

[3H]diazepam, IC50 antagonistic activity and IC50 binding affinities to displace 50 % of [3H]flunitrazepam 9-11 on benzodiazepines receptor. But in this work we have selected IC50 antagonistic activity for the concern study. For prediction of antagonistic activity molecular modeling and geometry optimization of all the compounds were carried out with CAChe Pro software by opting semiempirical PM3 method using MOPAC 2002. For prediction of biological activity of the compound listed in Table-1, the MLR analysis has been made by Project Leader Software associated with CAChe by using the above descriptors. The reliability of the proposed model was judged by calculating the values of the correlation 2 2 coefficient (r ) and cross validation coefficient (r CV).

Results and Discussion: Benzodiazepines (BDZs) are the drugs of choice in the pharmacotherapy of anxiety and related emotional disorders, sleep disorders, status epilepticus, and other convulsive states; they are used as centrally acting muscles relaxants, for premedication, and as inducing agents in anesthesiology. They act

via the benzodiazepine receptor site (BzR) on the -aminobutyric acid receptor (GABAA) family and have been subjected to extensive quantitative structure-activity relationship (QSAR) studies.12-15 There are relatively several structural classes of Non-Benzodiazepine (BDZ) compounds that have reasonable

76

affinity for the BZR and shows pharmacologic activity in vivo. But, in this work we have propose to make QSAR study of a series of β-carboline derivatives as Non-BDZ molecules whose biological activities are reported in terms of IC50 antagonistic activity binding to the benzodiazepine receptor. β-carbolines posssess a broad spectrum of pharmacological actions (as muscle relaxants) mediated via occupation of benzodiazepine receptor (BzR) in the central nervous system. Survey of the literature shows that biological activity of several β-Carboline derivatives have been measured and discussed in detail.12-15 The survey of literatures also indicates that no prediction of activity of β-carboline derivatives has been made with the help of selected topological descriptors. The trends of topological descriptors with antagonistic activity are graphically depicted in figure 1.

25

0χt 20 1χt 2χt 15 0χtv 1χtv 10 2χtv

Topological Topological Descriptor 1K 5 2K 3K 0 OBA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Compound

Figure 1. Trends of descriptors and biological activity

For prediction of antagonistic activity multiple regression analysis has been performed using topological descriptors used as independent variables and biological activity as dependent variable. A number of MLR equations have been developed using topological descriptors not more than three, via leave-one-out method. When k = 1 then the reliable modal is 0 v PBA = 0.256 × χt + 4.225 (Eqn.9) 2 r CV = 0.308 r2 = 0.571

When k = 2 then the reliable model obtained by different combination of descriptors is 0 2 PBA = 2.389 × χt -3.847 × χt + 7.486 (Eqn.10) 2 r CV = 0.648

77

r2 = 0.736 When k = 3 then the reliable model obtained by different combination of descriptors is

PBA = 1.869 × 1K -0.246 × 2K -3.724 × 3K +5.645 (Eqn.11) 2 r CV = 0.583 r2= 0.736

Among the above MLR equations Eqn.10 is best model as clear from the correlation coefficient (r2) and 2 cross validation coefficient (r CV) values. Predicted activity as obtained from this model is also tabulated in Table 2, while the trends of observed and predicted activity are graphically presented in Figure 2. 12.00

10.00

8.00

6.00 OBA OBA 4.00 PBA

2.00

0.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 PBA

Figure 1. Trends of OBA and PBA

Conclusions The study concluded that the connectivity index of zero order and connectivity second order are reliable descriptor to predict biological activity of β–carboline and its various derivatives. The study also reflected a direct relationship between biological activity and connectivity index of zero order (positive value of descriptor coefficient), while indirect relationship with connectivity index of second order (negative value of descriptor coefficient).

Acknowledgement The authors are thankful to Principal, Maharani Lal Kunwari Post Graduate College, Balrampur for laboratory facilities and to respected Dr. P. P. Singh for valuable discussion and suggestions.

References: 1. Soni, A. K.; Sahu, V. K.; Singh, P. P. Asian J. Chem. 2011, 23, 671. 2. Soni, A. K.; Sahu, S.; Sahu, V. K.; Singh, P. International Journal of Advanced Research 2015, 3, 1336.

78

3. Randi, M. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1975, 97, 6606. 4. Kier, L. B.; Hall, L. H. CROATICA CHEMICA ACTA. 2002, 75,371. 5. Kier, L. B.; Testa, B. Adv. Drug Res. 1995, 26, 1. 6. Kier, L. B.; Hall, L. H. Med. Chem. Res. 1997, 7, 335. 7. Kier, L. B.; Hall, L. H. Molecular Connectivity in Chemistry and Drug Research, Academic Press, New York, 1976. 8. Kier, L. B.; Hall, L. H. Molecular Connectivity in Structure Activity Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1986. 9. (a) Mo¨hler, H.; Fritsch, J. M.; Rudolph, U. J. Pharm. Exp. Ther. 2002, 300, 2. Sieghart, W.; Sperk, G. Curr. Top. Med. Chem. 2002, 2, 795. (b) Ernst, M.; Brauchart, D.; Boresch, S.; Sieghart, W. Neuroscience 2003, 119, 933. (c) Mo¨hler, H.; Crestani, F.; Rudolph, U. Curr. Opin. Pharm. 2001, 1, 22. (d) Skolnick, P.; Hu, R.; Cook, C.; Hurt, S.; Trometer, J.; Liu, R.; Huang, Q.; Cook, J. J. Pharm. Exp. Ther. 1997, 283, 488. 10. Bosmann, H. B.; Penney, D. P.; Case, K. R.; Di Stefano, P.; Averill, K. FEBS Lett. 1978, 87, 199. 11. (a) Tallmann, J. F.; Paul, S. M.; Skolnick, P.; Gallager, D. W. Science 1980, 207, 274. (b) Tallmann, J. F.; Thomas, J. W.; Gallager, D. W. Nature (London) 1978, 274, 383. 12. Blair, T.; Webb, G. A. J. Med. Chem. 1977, 20, 1206. 13. Greco, G.; Novellino, E.; Silipo, C.; Vittoria, A. Quant. Struct.- Act. Relat. 1992, 11, 461. 14. Gupta, S. P.; Paleti, A. Quant. Struct.-Act. Relat. 1996, 15, 12. 15. Hadjipavlou-Litina, D.; C. Hansch, C. Chem. Rev. 1993, 93.

15

INDIA’S TRYST WITH TECHNOLOGY: ONE STEP AHEAD

RUCHI SRIVASTAVA

ISABELLA THOBURN COLLEGE, LUCKNOW

Abstract As a developing nation, India is currently focused on expanding its physical infrastructure, enhancing its agriculture and industrial productivity as well as improving its global competitiveness. Today, optimum use of capital or labour or resources is dependent on technological breakthroughs and cutting-edge technologies - nano technology, biotechnology among others. Efficient technologies are important to meet the energy needs of the nation, as also are environment friendly technologies that lower the levels of green house gas emissions. Finding new options and cost-effective solutions for growth require that our scientists and researchers stay one step ahead rather than catch-up with the latest technologies. We must constantly look ahead to the technologies of the future so that India can be a storehouse of knowledge and expertise. In a fast changing technological world, the rate of innovation would need to increase dramatically. We need to find new methodologies, new products, and new ideas. For

79

accomplishing these objectives we need highly skilled manpower,engineers, researchers and scientists, who would provide knowledge, techniques and technologies to transform the landscape of India. Technology and its application should reach a broad section of our society. The majority of our people still live in villages. We must make efforts to reach out to the rural areas. The telecommunication revolution has provided connectivity to our rural population and there are many examples of how this has helped our farmers in multiple ways like accessing information about weather forecasts, markets, policies and programmes.

Introduction The post-independence technology trajectory for India had two broad objectives. First, it aimed at building up strategic technological capability, and secondly, it strived to acquire industrial technological capability through learning and catch-up. Achievements on these fronts are quite often judged by contrasting the first with the second. If we analyse India’s technological progress in terms of its achievements on the strategic technology front in comparison with its technological effort towards industrial competitiveness and economic growth, we get somewhat mixed and conflicting signals about India’s technological accomplishments. It remains to be established how far India’s success in strategic technology can be compared with the existing global frontiers in these fields, generally benchmarked by the achievements of the West. But there is no denial that India’s achievements commanded a lot of awe and admiration from the entire world, especially given the fact that India was still a poor developing economy with very limited material capability. Therefore building up of indigenous technological capabilities as well as technological learning for catch-up became extremely important for its industrial and scientific aspirations.

Accordingly, India’s experience with technological progress has been varied and contrasting. During the first few decades of India’s development experience, the level of its industrial technology was in no way comparable with its achievements on the strategic technology front, however isolated and sporadic. Contrasts persisted even during the later decades of the nineties and beyond when India could actually showcase some of its technological capabilities in the high-tech sectors like Information Technology (IT) and subsequently was directly catering the world market, although its IT infrastructure back home remained seriously deficient.

In this paper we focus only on India’s experience with innovations and technology generation for competitiveness and economic growth.

Channels of Technology Generation in India We can primarily identify four channels through which the government intended to advance the cause of technology generation (R&D) in India: (1) investing in applied industrial research, (2) promoting science education and fundamental academic research, (3) public-sector production and (4) offering fiscal and non-fiscal R&D incentives to the private sector.

Applied Industrial Research If we look at the R&D expenditure incurred in India before 1990s we find that the share of national R&D expenditure in gross national product (GNP) had increased steadily from 0.17% in 1958-59 to 0.98% in

80

1987-88, the major share of which was borne by the Government.6 The overwhelming majority of government R&D expenditure was allocated to various public sector research laboratories, under the auspices of the CSIR (Council of Scientific and Industrial Research) engaged in applied research in a wide range of fields including areas like aeronautics, experimental medicine, environment, oceanography and structural engineering.

Science Education and Fundamental Research The grand vision of building up indigenous capabilities in India was thought could be achieved not only by imparting science education to the coming generations to constitute a large pool of highly skilled workforce but by also improving the conditions for fundamental research in the country. The higher education policy post-independence envisaged setting up of several Indian Institutes of Technology, Regional Engineering Colleges and Central Universities across the country. Although the newly modelled ‘technology’ education institutes along with the traditional university system did succeed enormously in their endeavour to generate high skilled human resources

Public Sector Production As mentioned in the introduction, public-sector production inspired by the Soviet model of a planned economy was seriously considered in India post-independence, especially from the Second Five Year plan onwards. Accordingly, inward looking development strategy and a meticulously planned out diversified industrial production base ranging from simple consumer items to sophisticated capital goods and heavy machinery was adopted in India. This implied heavy investments on import substituting industries across the board on the part of the government. Indeed, it is through such a process that building up of indigenous technological capabilities as well as technological learning for catch-up became extremely important for India’s industrial and economic aspirations.

R&D incentives to the private sector The above three channels clearly indicate that India’s technology policy in the pre reforms era was essentially grounded on building up of national level capabilities through the public institutions. But, at the same time, industry (private and public sector) was encouraged to actively engage in R&D activities to develop absorptive and adaptive capabilities. To this end, the government also offered specific R&D incentives with the objective of building up domestic technological capability for rapid industrialisation going beyond spending directly on R&D. Prior to the 1990s, the main thrust of the R&D incentives was to generate indigenous technologies primarily in the institutional sector (public funded R&D institutions) and facilitate effective commercialisation, transfer and absorption of such technologies in the industrial sector. There were very few incentives at the firm level with the explicit aim of augmenting technology- creating capabilities. In-house R&D was encouraged only to facilitate acquisition of technological capabilities of absorption, adaptation and assimilation. Special incentives were given to firms using indigenous technologies developed by R&D institutions.

81

Understanding the Process of Technological Capability Acquisition by the Indian Industry The econometric results obtained by Ray and Bhaduri (2001) presented new and interesting insights into the process of technology generation and learning in the Indian pharmaceutical and electronics sectors. They made a clear distinction between R&D inputs and R&D outputs in a research production function framework to understand the process of technology generation. First of all, learning through interaction (spillover) proved to be important in the research production process for both sectors. Indeed, the two sectors have followed two distinct trajectories of technological learning, resulting in different kinds of technological capability generation. In the electronics industry in India (characterized primarily by “screw-driver” technology), assembly operations, production engineering, shop-floor practices and quality control could prove to be the key elements of technological effort. The pharmaceutical industry in India, on the other hand, followed a rather different trajectory of technological learning based on reverse engineering.12 This essentially implies decoding an original process for producing a bulk drug. This involves a detailed understanding of the chemical properties of the active molecule, the excipients used and the chemical process of conversion from the active molecular compound to the final bulk drug. Effectively then, the learning process has been largely know- why oriented in the pharmaceutical sector, while in electronics, it has perhaps been simpler and more know how oriented. We may expect a significant role of formal R&D in the learning process of the former. Learning in electronics, on the other hand, is likely to be less dependent on formal R&D.13 It will be more learning by doing and learning through experience in this sector.

Concluding remarks: the way forward India’s strength within the manufacturing sector which requires process, product and capital engineering skills is now well demonstrated. If we look at the Indian manufacturing experience we find that India has several advantages in skill-intensive industries, such as auto-components, pharmaceuticals, forgings (both for automotive and non-automotive sectors), power and transport machinery, high-end electrical and electronics and specialty chemicals. Apart from the abundance of skills, these advantages include technological capability (process, product and capital engineering) plus established raw material bases, a mature supply base and a growing domestic demand. This has lead to India being considered as a design house, a tooling centre, a components base, and a manufacturing hub by many MNEs. Indeed, from the experience of India’s economic progress in the last decade or so, it is quite evident that knowledge intensive sectors have been driving India’s growth. At this critical juncture when India is imminently poised for a successful transition to a knowledge economy, it becomes all the more important to revitalise India’s technological capability building through the most appropriate coupling of creative pursuits (especially through public funded research) with applications for industrial R&D. It is in this context, we need to take a fresh look at the role of universities and other institutions of higher learning.

82

References 1. Alhluwalia, I.J. (1991), Productivity and Growth in Indian Manufacturing, Delhi: Oxford University Press. 2. Balakrishnan, P. and Puspangadan, K. (1994) ‘Total Factor Productivity Growth in Manufacturing Industry: A Fresh Look’, Economic and Political Weekly, July. 3. Bhaduri, S. and Ray, A.S. (2004), ‘Exporting through Technological Capability: Econometric Evidence from India’s Pharmaceutical and Electrical/Electronics Firms’, Oxford Development Studies, 32 (1), pp 87-100. 4. Dore, R. (1984) ‘Technological Self Reliance: Sturdy Ideal or Self Serving Rhetoric’, in M. Fransman and K. King (eds.) Technological Capability in the Third World, London: Macmillan. 5. Evenson, R. E. and Johnson, D. K. N. (1998) ‘Invention in Developing Countries’, Unpublished mimeo. 6. Guha A. and Ray A.S. (2004), ‘India and Asia in the World Economy: The Role of Human Capital and Technology’, International Studies, vol.41 (3), pp 300-311. 7. Lall, S. (1978), ‘Developing Countries as Exporters of Technology: A Preliminary Analysis’, in Giersch (ed.) International Economic Development and Resource Transfer Workshop, Tubingen: J.C.B. Mohr. 8. Lall, S. (1984) ‘India’s Technological Capacity: Effects of Trade, Industrial, Science & Technology Policies’ In M. Fransman and K. King (ed.) Technological Capability in the Third World, London: Macmillan. 9. Lall, S. (1985). Multinationals, Technology and Exports, London: Macmillan. 10. Ray, A.S. (2004), ‘The Changing Structure of R&D Incentives in India: The Pharmaceutical Sector’, Science Technology and Society, 9 (2), pp 297-317. 11. Ray, A.S. (2005) ‘The Indian Pharmaceutical Industry at Crossroads: Implications for India’s Health Care’, in Amiya Bagchi and Krishna Soman (eds) Maladies, Preventives and Curatives: Debates in Public Health in India, New Delhi: Tulika Books. 12. Ray, A.S. (2006), ‘Going Global: India’s Economic Aspirations and Apprehensions in the New Millennium’ in F.Villares (ed.) India, Brazil and South Africa: Perspectives and Alliances, Sao Paulo: Editora UNESP. 13. Ray, A.S. and Bhaduri S. (2001), ‘R&D and Technological Learning in Indian Industry’, Oxford Development Studies, 29 (2), pp. 155-171. 14. Ray, A.S. and Bhaduri, S. (2008), ‘Co-evolution of IPR Policy and Technological Learning in th Developing Countries: A Game-theoretic Model’, Paper for Globelics 6 International Conference, Mexico City, September 2008. 15. Ray, A.S., et al (1999), The Role of In-House R&D in Indian Industry, Report prepared for the Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India, July. 16. Rosenberg, N. (1976), Perspective on Technology, New York: Cambridge University Press. 17. Schumpeter, J. A. (1980 (1934)), The Theory of Economic Development, London: Oxford University Press. 18. Schumpeter, J.A. (1939), Business Cycles, New York: McGraw-Hill.

83

19. Solow, R.M. (1957) ‘Technical change and the aggregate production function’, Review of Economics and Statistics, August, pp. 312-320. 20. Young, A (1995), ‘The Tyranny of Numbers: Confronting the Statistical Realities of the East Asian Growth Experience’, Quarterly Journal of Economics, August.

16

PLASMA SPRAYING AND MATHEMATICAL MODULATION MOHAMMAD MIYAN DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS, SHIA P. G. COLLEGE, LUCKNOW Abstract Plasma spraying has now a wide industrial development and users require more sophisticated properties of the deposit material. If plasma re-melting, purification and extractive metallurgy are still in their infancy, the results obtained are promising and raise a great interest for industrial developments. That is why a better knowledge of the phenomena involved is needed specially for modelling various plasma devices configurations taking into account mixing, chemical reactions, non-equilibrium effects, if possible using 3-D configurations. But, due to the complexity of the models and to the various assumptions the results are meaningless if they are not compared with measurements and a great effort has to be done to computerize all the devices already available to start a systematic study of the mixing of a cold gas with a plasma, of the reduced pressure spraying devices, of the particles injection and behavior, of the heat transfer to the walls or electrodes, of the chemical kinetic. Now, after a brief description of the industrial developments of Werma1 plasmas in the fields of thermal spraying and extractive metallurgy, the state of the art of our knowledge in the following subjects is reviewed: modelling of the plasmas, plasma transport properties (LTE or two temperatures conditions) and cold gas mixing, modelling of the plasma particle momentum and heat transfer measurements of the plasma jet temperatures and velocity distributions measurements of the particles in flight in the plasma jet : velocity, surface temperature, trajectory, size evolution etc. are correlated between measurements and calculations. In the present paper, there is a comparative analysis between the mathematical modelling and actual measurements using experiments. Keywords: Mathematical modeling, Plasma spraying, Plasma measurement.

Introduction The formation of a protective coating by plasma spraying a stream of molten metal or ceramic particles was developed during the sixties. The major advantage of plasma compared with the higher particle velocity obtainable up to 500 m/s and the high temperatures achieved i.e., more than 10,0000 K making possible to melt the most refractory materials. The rapid solidification by plasma deposition cooling rates up to K/s combines melting, quenching and consolidation in one single operation and such cooling rates result in grain sizes of 0.25 to 0.5, μm for metals and alloys. However the quality of the coatings obtained depends strongly on one hand on the heat and momentum transfer between particles and plasma (the particles must be melted upon impact) controlling also the chemical reactions of the particles with their environment during their flight as well as their decomposition and on the other hand

84

of the heat transfer control to the substrate and deposit while spraying. For a long time, industrial development of plasma sprayed coatings has been mostly empirical, the physical and chemical understanding of the phenomena lagging far behind. However with the important development of plasma sprayed deposits in aeronautics, mechanics, nuclear engineering, electrical engineering etc., a better understanding of the phenomena involved is needed to improve the quality of the coatings as well as the spraying yields; the properties of such deposits required by industry being more and more sophisticated. This improved knowledge of the phenomena is also needed with the industrial development of plasma jets or of transferred arcs for the following:

1. Melting and purification by transferred arcs (100 ≤P ≤1000 kW) struck in a controlled atmosphere chamber between a water cooled crucible and a cathode; the material to be treated being introduced as particles, pellets, rods, hollow pieces etc. 2. Heating of steel billets, blast air injected at the tuyeres of blast furnaces. 3. Scrap melting with power levels. 4. The extractive metallurgy, still at its very beginning, using mostly transferred arcs but with high power pilot plants for example in South Africa. 5. The plasma reformer for direct reduction mainly developed either for direct reduced iron production or for smelt reduction.

The aim of this paper is to make a brief review of the state of the art in the fields of modelling and measurement of plasma jets, seeded or not, with solid particles and to try to underline where the lacks are and what is still needed.

Plasma Processes Modelling Plasma Flows In spite of the intensive research effort that has been devoted over the last thirty years to the study of electric arcs, the mathematical modelling has developed slowly due to the difficulties encountered in the analytical description of the electrode regions. These regions are characterized by their small dimensions, very steep temperature gradients and important non equilibrium effects. It seems that the arc is capable of producing a vast variety of different phenomena induced by minor changes of the mechanical properties of the electrodes, of their geometry, of small impurities at their surface. If at the moment the cathode phenomena are still far to be well understood, specially for the emission phenomena of cold cathodes i.e., cylindrical copper electrodes widely used now in arc gas heaters, some phenomena have been emphasized for cold anodes with argon as plasma gas such as negative anode drop, instead of the positive one generally assumed, and the strong non equilibrium effects, phenomena allowing to understand better the heat transfer. However, what happens when the anode material evaporates (of primary importance for melting, smelting, extractive metallurgy, welding with transferred arcs) has to be studied. The experiments of Tsantrizoo et al. with a transferred argon arc on a molten copper anode have shown an important evolution of the voltage as soon as the anode evaporates. After sometimes spectroscopic measurements performed in Limoges with a TIG stroked onto an iron plate show that two plasma regions can be distinguished: a quasi "pure argon" plasma region in L.T.E. and a "metallic vapor plasma region" near the anodic molten bath. In this latter region, a strong disequilibrium

85

between the "argon temperature" values and the neutral iron excitation temperature values is observed. The results suggest that the amplitude of the thermal transfer to the work piece depends largely on the efficiency of the elementary processes that govern the energy exchanges between the "argon" plasma and the metallic "vapor" plasma within the arc plasma column. The electrode phenomena must take into account the elementary processes i.e., collisions and non equilibrium effects as well as the flow problems to model the balance between the drag force due to the cold gas flow near the walls and the electromagnetic force due to the bending of the plasma column when the arc strikes at the nozzle anode of a plasma torch and it is at the moment far too complex to be included in the flow models. The flow models are developed either for the arc column or for plasma jets exiting the nozzle. The main assumptions of such models are that the plasma is in L.T.E., the jet is steady and possesses cylindrical symmetry, and radiation transfer is negligible as well as compressibility effects except for supersonic plasma flows as those used for spraying under reduced pressure. Two types of approaches are then possible the plasma jet is supposed to be laminar and the flow is described by the Navier Stokes equations, continuity and conservation of energy for high Reynolds numbers, obtained with rather low temperature plasmas (T=60000 K), the dependent variables are decomposed into mean and fluctuating parts and the resulting equations are then time averaged to produce the equations for the evolution of the mean quantities. Usually density weighted averaging is used and the mean flow equations are closed by assuming gradient diffusion for the turbulent correlations and using K-C turbulence model for the Reynolds stresses. The governing equations are then put in a finite difference form and solved numerically using iterative procedures due to the coupled nature of the equations. These numerical solutions are classified in parabolic and elliptic. The parabolic and much simple case corresponds to a one-way behavior i.e., the flow is called boundary-layer-type with no influence of the downstream on the upstream because axial convection dominates axial diffusion. The forward marching solutions algorithms such as those of Gemmix program extended to plasmas by numerous authors, greatly reduces computational time. Most of the plasma jets or transferred arcs are relevant of this type of parabolic solutions. However when a plasma jet exiting in a pipe is considered, for example to heat the blast air in the tuyeres of a blast furnace, recirculation problems, participating to the heating of the whole gas, have to be considered and then elliptic solutions must be used for example with the simple program. In this case downstream boundary conditions are needed. Typically these are taken zero axial gradients but if the boundary is not far enough downstream, the jet decay rate will be affected and the computational domain should therefore, be increased, until the results are unaffected, but the grid must remain fine enough to resolve steep gradients. In such heating flows with elliptic models the problem of heat transfer to the surrounding walls is also of primary importance. For the conductive-convective fluxes, the choice of the proper grid and of the velocity distributions in the viscous area near the wall, in the transition region and the fitting with their fully turbulent area far from the wall is complex and the radiative fluxes cannot be neglected. Other problems arise from the boundary conditions and for example up to now the surrounding gas pumped by the fast plasma flow has always been supposed to be of the same nature as the plasma gas, thus avoiding the calculation of complex transport properties available only for gases such as Ar, He, N2, H2, 02 and for some mixtures N2-02, N2 -H2, Ar-H2. These transport properties are very sensitive to the choice of the interaction potentials. The anode evaporation also requires the knowledge of transport properties plasma gas" metallic vapor and up to now results are only available for Ar -Cu and Ar-Fe, the unknown interaction potentials being assumed

86

to be hard core ones. Chen and his co-workers have also demonstrated that the symmetrical injection of a cold gas into the plasma jet modifies strongly the equilibrium, the temperature discrepancy between electrons Te and heavy particles Th being most severe at the location of cold flow injection (cold argon in argon plasma). This effect is introduced in the governing equations by splitting the energy equation in two: one for the electrons and one for the heavy particles with a closure equation relating Te to Th via elastic collisions. The corresponding thermodynamic properties are calculated using the Modified Saha Equations (MSE) method introducing the ratio θ = Te/Th and the transport properties by extending the work of Devoto developed at equilibrium. However, Bonnefoi had proposed a new definition of the diffusion forces in a two temperatures (2-T) model and a different approach of the reaction term. It is worth noting that the formulas developed for the transport properties in a 2-T model make use of the collision integrals calculated at equilibrium. Aubreton had demonstrated that this approach is valid for θ≤3 i.e., typical ratio for atmospheric thermal plasmas where a cold gas is injected or for reduced pressure plasmas down to about 40 Torr. For θ > 3 it is necessary to use a kinetic approach for which the nature of the gas mono-atomic or diatomic has a great importance. However for heat transfer between plasma and particles the integrated values of the thermal conductivity are not really affected by the differences between the two methods. Up to now these 2-T calculations have been developed for Ar, H2,

02 and Ar-H2, Ar-O2 mixtures. Moreover, the injection of a cold gas chemically different from the plasma gas can induce important chemical reactions such as those obtained when injecting cold oxygen into nitrogen plasma. With the high temperature gradients encountered in thermal plasmas (heating rates up to 109 K/s, cooling rates up to 108 K/s due for example to the fast expansion of the jet) the kinetic calculations should be included in the flow models thus making them very complex with the stiffness of the solutions of the kinetic equations. That is why, up to now; none of these calculations have been developed in the general case; The first results obtained being limited to flows with uniform radial velocity and temperature distributions. At last it should be underlined that all the developments of the flow models are 2D but that most practical problems are 3-D (particle injection for spraying, plasma torch blowing in the tuyere of a blast furnace etc.) and up to now only big companies such as Westinghouse in U.S.A., E.D.F. in France have developed 3-D models for gas heating, but simplified models where the plasma properties are kept constant to reduce the computing time.

Plasma Particle Momentum and Heat Transfer In view of the paper of Pfender in this issue, we will just give here a few indications about the problems involved. Due to the importance of the thermal treatment of powders in plasma torches and furnaces a considerable attention has been given to the plasma particle momentum and heat transfer (see for example the references given in. These works underline the necessity to take into account corrections terms or integrated thermal properties for the steep gradients in the boundary layer round the particles, non continuous effects for particles smaller than about 10 m at atmospheric pressure, turbulent dispersion, charging effect, evaporation effect. For given temperatures and velocity distributions of the plasma jet, the trajectory and temperature history of individual particles, assumed to be spherical, are calculated. However in practice what is needed is the statistical behavior of the injected particles which

87

have size and velocity distributions. For a given injector diameter and a given carrier gas flow rate the particles will have (due to their size distribution) different injection velocities and even with the proper injection velocity, the particles passing near the injector wall will have their velocity tending to zero. That is why the trajectories and temperature histories of the particles must be calculated for different sizes and velocities and the results averaged according to the starting distributions and particles flow rates. Moreover, when the particle mass flow rate increases too many the particles start to cool down the plasma jet as well as when small particles evaporate consuming a large amount of energy and this has to be included in the calculation program rending it very heavy. At last one has to underline that all these calculations neglect the cold gas injection that would requires a 3-D calculation to take into account its effect on the plasma flow.

Measurements and Comparison with Modelling Needs of Measurements Quite a lot of data are needed temperature and velocity distributions of the plasma flow as well as non- equilibrium effects concentration of the different species excited or not trajectory, velocity, surface temperature of the particles to compare the calculated distributions with the measured ones, to have reliable models and to obtain relevant data either for the particles (drag and Nusselt coefficients accounting for the various phenomena envolved) or for the plasma gas itself (diffusion coefficients, chemical rates etc.).

Plasma Jet Measurements Temperature Distributions What can be reached easily with emission spectroscopy, is the excitation temperature (through atomic spectra), the electron density (through line profiles of Stark enlarged lines), the rotational and vibrational temperatures (through rotational spectra), but the electron temperature has to be calculated with the help of the preceding data. Of course such measurements give averaged values (for times of a few tens ms) masking the fluctuations of the arc. However, due to the steep radial gradients, Abel's inversion has to be performed. That is why almost all the measurements have been performed for axially symmetric jets and a big effort has been made to automates these measurements, by moving the plasma, using rotating mirrors displacing rapidly a metal strip into the jet, devices allowing rather fast measurements for atomic line intensities, by using 2D optical multichannel analyzers (OMA) allowing fast measurements of rotational spectra (up to 40 lines) or of line profiles. It is worth to notice that rotational spectra will give temperatures in the range 3500 - 9000 K about and atomic lines in the range 8000 K - 13000 K, while ionic lines are between 15000 and 21000 K and the precision is about 10%. The temperature ranges encountered in the various plasmas are the following: For heating 3000 - 9000 K about, for spraying 3000- 12000 K, for transferred arcs 7000 - 180000 K and one has to remind that, according to the fast variation of the volume emission coefficients with temperature, a range of three decades about is accessible for a given set of the measurement device corresponding to ∂T = 40000 K at the maximum. In a transferred argon arc at atmospheric pressure, 22 3 where the electron density is rather high (ne = 10 e /m ), the measured excitation temperatures are in reasonable agreement (within 15%) with the calculated distributions. However for a nitrogen d. c. plasma jet where cold nitrogen is introduced symmetrically, the measurements have shown that when

88

increasing the cold gas flow rate, the temperature iso-contours (measured from rotational spectra corresponding, due to the fast relaxation translation rotation, to the heavy particles temperature) are pinched and lengthened - the cooling of the fringes result in a fast diffusion of the electrons from the plasma center to the periphery of the jet the population of the levels close to ionization limit is thus no more in thermal equilibrium with the one of the levels close to the resonant one the diffusion phenomena, very important in this case, have to be included in the models where they have been neglected up to now of course these first results obtained for the cold gas injection emphasize the non- equilibrium effects already taken into account in the models, but where diffusion effects have to be introduced. It would be also necessary to develop the measurements in non-symmetrical plasmas where these effects are probably enhanced. Non-symmetrical Abel's inversions are now possible with the use of computers on line to account for the quantity of data to be treated. They have already been developed in a simple case for thermal plasma jets, the use of OMA being very promising for such measurements. If the problems of investment costs are not considered, CARS technique could probably be used in thermal plasmas to measure the heavy species temperature, the extension of the temperature range (developed for combustion up to 30000 K), being quite possible (up to 70000 K). The advantage of CARS over emission spectroscopy is the possibility to obtain a very good spatial resolution (avoiding the problems of Abel's inversion), an important signal (even in the plume of the jet) and probably to measure the temperatures in plasmas seeded with particles (in combustion flame the temperature seems to be almost insensitive to the presence of soot particles). Laser induced fluorescence (LIF) gives signals proportional to the number density difference ∂Nu of the upper level due to laser pumping and the problem is to relate ∂Nu either to the temperature or to the density of the lower level (often a fundamental level or a meta stable one). Such relationships in the general case are obtained through the matrix density and it is only in particular conditions, generally not full filled in thermal plasmas, that the approximation of the rate equations can be used. That is why in thermal plasmas such measurements can give only relative values, however very instructive; showing for example that NO in its fundamental state is produced mainly in the periphery of a nitrogen d. c. plasma jet where cold oxygen is injected symmetrically. However LIE is the only mean to obtain information about reaction or quenching routes via experiments performed at reduced pressure (0.1 to 10 Torr .) in a flowing afterglow where the different species about to react are excited through collision transfers with various meta stable atoms.

Velocity Distributions The methods using the Doppler shift of the lines are limited to supersonic jets at low pressure (below 50 Torr.) and up to now only the seeding of the jet with small particles, which velocity is measured by LDA has been used in thermal plasmas. However the precision of the measurements is questionable due to measurement difficulties with small particles and to the problems of momentum transfer between plasma and small particles (Knudsen effect among others underlined by the results presented at Montreal for 40 μm particles in plasmas at 50 Torr). Such uncertainties in the measurements may partly explain the discrepancies between measured and calculated temperature and velocity distributions in thermal spraying jet. It is necessary to emphasize the importance of having a reliable velocity distribution at the nozzle exit to obtain correct results with the models developed for spraying plasma jets where particle heating occurs in a few tens of millimeters. That is why a recent method of resonant

89

Doppler velocimetry with alkali atoms seeded in flames might be very interesting if it is possible to extend it to thermal plasmas. Now the problem is different when one wants to heat a cold gas injected round the plasma jet, the influence of initial velocity and temperature distributions of the plasma being almost negligible for the distributions obtained at distances comprised between 6 and 10 times the pipe diameter.

Particle Measurements Velocity LDV is the main technique used; it allows high spatial resolution (less than 1 mm3) and high temporal resolution (down to 5 ns). Among the different detection devices, only counters and frequency trackers are able to associate a velocity with a single given particle. To perform the measurements in the plasma core itself requires on one hand the use of mono chromators with band pass round 1 A0 in order to eliminate, as much as possible, the light emitted by the plasma and on the other hand either to increase the power level of the laser or to increase the dimensions of the measurement volume by performing it within an angle close to the laser beam direction to obtain the maximum emission of the scattered light.

Surface Temperature The up-to-date technique is that of discrete in flight color pyrometer, first developed with absolute flux measurements which precision was poor (the result depends on the emission coefficient of the particle and on its diameter which varies as soon as evaporation starts). Recently this technique has been developed by measuring the ratio of fluxes emitted at two wavelengths (two color pyrometer) thus eliminating the problem of the diameter and reducing the one of unknown emission coefficients (assumption of grey body). Actually such measurements, performed in volumes of ϕ = 160 μm, 1 = 15,000 μm, are statistical measurements and give in fact surface temperature distributions. However it is important to underline that, whatever will be the future technique, it will never be possible to perform the measurements in the core of the plasma jets, heating zone of the particles and where their flux cannot overcome the plasma flux as long as their temperature is not high enough (more than 2 2000 K for 20 μm particles about).

Partic1e Trajectories and Concentrations The number of particles travelling at different locations in the plasma jet may be measured by counting, for a given time, the pulses resulting from the light scattered by the particles passing through a focused laser beam. A measurement volume of less than 10-3 mm3 is achievable. The particle mean trajectory is determined from the position of maximum concentration of the particles. It is worth to notice that, even with very narrow size distributions (Al2 03 particles 18 3 μm) injected with the optimum velocity, the trajectory distribution is large: 20 mm downstream the injector, it covers about 1/3 of the surface of a plasma jet “slice”.

Particle Sizes Combined measurements of velocity and size of particles are achieved by extended laser Doppler anemometers: the amplitude and modulation depth of LDA signals depend on the size of the scattering

90

particles, the optical properties of the particle material, the wavelengths of the employed laser radiation, the angle between the two incident beams and the size and location of the receiving aperture. These sizing methods are essentially the visibility and pedestal calibrations methods where size and velocity measurements are achieved on the same signals and the power calibrations methods for which the optical probes for velocimetry and sizing are different..

Correlation and Calculation of Measurements First one has to remark that the measurements on the particles and on the plasma flow are performed separately and second that, to get reliable information, the measurements on the particles should be performed at same location and time. If previous comparisons between the calculated and measured velocities gave a reasonable agreement (within 15%) for measurements along the axis, the discrepancies between measured and calculated temperatures have been reduced with the two color pyrometer. However the last measurements underline the importance of various effects: heat propagation for ceramics, evaporation, Knudsen etc., but also the necessity to make statistical calculations of the trajectories and thus velocities, surface temperatures and diameters to compare measured distributions with calculated ones. Experimental Diagrams

Figure-1 (A snapshot of plasma turbulence and ion acceleration at the first stage)

Figure-2 (Schematic Diagram of the Plasma Spray Process)

91

Figure-3 (Diagram of Plasma spray)

Figure-4 (Diagram of liners sleeves thermal spray process)

Conclusion The plasma re-melting, purification and extractive metallurgy are still in their infancy; the first results obtained are promising and raise a great interest for industry. That is why a better knowledge of the phenomena involved is needed specially for modelling various plasma devices configurations taking into account mixing, chemical reactions, non-equilibrium effects if possible using 3-D configurations. However due to the complexity of the models and to the various assumptions the results are meaningless if they are not compared with measurements and a great effort has to be done to computerize all the devices already available to start a systematic study of the mixing of a cold gas with a plasma, of the reduced pressure spraying devices, of the particles injection and behavior, of the heat transfer to the walls or electrodes, of the chemical kinetic.

References 1. A. S. Almgren, J. B. Bell, P. Colella, L. H. Howell, and M. L. Welcome, A conservative adaptive projection method for the variable density incompressible Navier–Stokes equations, J. Comput. Phys. 142, 1 (1998). 2. A. VARDELLE, P. FAUCHAIS, M. VARDELLE, Actualite Chimique, 10, 69 (1981). 3. H. Wu, B. W. Yu, M. L. Li, and Y. Yang, Two-dimensional fluid model simulation of bell jar top inductively coupled plasma, IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci. 25, No. 1, 1 (February 1997). 4. J. H. Ingold, Two-fluid theory of the positive column of a gas discharge, Phys. Fluids 15, No. 1, 75 (January 1972).

92

5. J. L. BESSON, M. VARDELLE, P. BOCH, L’ industrie Ceramique 727, 249 (1979). 6. M. J. Berger and P. Colella, Local adaptive mesh refinement for shock hydrodynamics, J. Comput. Phys. 82, No. 1, 64 (1989). 7. ` M. A. Lieberman and A. J. Lichtenberg, Principles of Plasma Discharges and Materials Processing (Wiley, New York, 1994). 8. M. J. Berger and J. Oliger, Adaptive mesh refinement for hyperbolic partial differential equations, J. Comput. Phys. 53, 484 (1984). 9. N. N. RYKALIN , V.V. KUDINOV, Pure and Applied Chemistry 48, 229 (1976). 10. P. Colella, M. R. Dorr, and D. D. Wake, A conservative finite difference method for the numerical solution of plasma fluid equations, J. Comput. Phys. 149, 168 (1999). 11. P. FAUCHAIS, A. VARDELLE, M. VARDELLE, J.F. COUDERT and B. PATEYRON, Plasma spraying and extractive metallurgy, Pure &Appl. Chem., Vol. 57, No. 9, pp. 1171-1178 (1985). 12. P. L. G. Ventzek, M. Grapperhaus, and M. J. Kushner, Investigation of electron source and ion flux uniformity in high plasma density inductively coupled etching tools using two-dimensional modeling, J. Vacuum Sci. Technol. B 12, No. 6, 3118 (1994). 13. R. A. Stewart, P. Vitello, and D. B. Graves, Two-dimensional fluid model of high density inductively coupled plasma sources, J. Vacuum Sci. Technol. B 12 (January 1994). 14. R. J. Hoekstra and M. J. Kushner, The effect of subwafer dielectrics on plasma properties in plasma etching reactors, J. Appl. Phys. 77, No. 8, 3668 (1995). 15. S. D. Cohen and A. C. Hindmarsh, CVODE User Guide, Technical Report UCRL-MA-118618, Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, September 1994. 16. http://www.nanowerk.com/news2/space/newsid=42026.php 17.https://www.researchgate.net/publication/259003877_Parametric_Appraisal_of_Process_Paramete rs_for_Adhesion_of_Plasma_Sprayed_Nanostructured_YSZ_Coatings_Using_Taguchi_Experiment al_Design

17

MAINTENANCE BREEDING FOR QUALITY CANE SEED PRODUCTION IN SUGARCANE D.K. PANDEY ICAR- INDIAN INSTITUTE OF SUGARCANE RESEARCH, LUCKNOW

Introduction Varieties have proven to be one of the most enduring investments a grower. Once a good variety is obtained, he usually grows his own seed cane and never has to buy again, unless a better variety becomes available. Variety identity is easily compromised when planting is made from commercial fields that have not been rogue out for mixture and off types. Mixtures occur when a different variety is introduced after field reformation and remnants of old crops are still viable. They sprout and grow with

93

new crop and mixed field established. Careless cutting of seed cane from unidentified/ or misidentified varieties can of course lead to mixtures.

In sugarcane cultivation, seed i.e. seed cane is a critical input. It accounts to about 50 % of the total cost of cultivation; if poor quality seed canes are used then no other input is going to help in improving the cane yield as well as cane quality. Varietal purity ensures that the desired variety is grown and seed cane is not contaminated with unwanted varieties/ or susceptible varieties to diseases. Young, well- grown seed cane is more vigorous than old cane and germinates better giving early, rapid establishment and uniform growth. All these requirements can only be satisfied by seed cane produced in proper and well-managed nurseries and not from commercial fields grown for crushing.

Besides true to type (genetic purity), the other very important aspect of seed cane quality is seed health. Sugarcane, vegetatively propagated crop, health of planting material is the backbone of sugarcane industry. The biggest factor which progressively degenerate the seed crop is the presence of ratoon stunting disease (RSD), grassy shoot disease (GSD), smut, mosaic, leaf scald and to some extent red rot diseases which once inside the plant, particularly viruses and mycoplasma go on multiplying in the successive generations. Since high quality seed is free from various diseases and has better seed health, it tends to produce healthy seedlings with no initial disease inoculums. A superior quality seed not only increases productivity per unit area, but it also helps produce uniform crops without any admixtures - important for obtaining high prices on the market. High-quality produce also results in high sugar recovery, which translates into increased profits.

Significance of maintenance breeding in sugarcane The genetic purity of the commercial seed cane multiplication will largely depend on the maintenance of original characteristics of the variety as well as its vigour at the nucleus and breeder seed level, which is essential to obtain high yield in farmer’s field. A clone can be maintained indefinitely through asexual propagation. Thus, clones are theoretically immortal. But in practice, clones have a limited life and often-older clones lose vigour and productivity. The loss in vigour and productivity of clones with time is inherent in the clone i.e. it is due to vegetative reproduction itself. The problem of genetic purity some times arises because of voluntary plants coming from the previous crop. There are many components, which form seed cane quality, not all of equal value and importance.

Varietal component The term variety/ cultivar indicates a population of individuals (example kernel in wheat and rice, plants from lot of tubers in potato, plants/stools of a seed cane lot in sugarcane) known to have morphological, physiological, cytological, chemical or other characteristics, which do not change substantially from generation to the next generation. The varietal /or genetic purity is a per requisite for attributes like;

1. Germination and vigour 2. Earliness, hardiness 3. Uniform maturity

94

4. Synergistic effects with other inputs 5. Yielding capacity 6. Resistance to diseases, pests, water logging and drought 7. Juice and gur quality 8. Chemical composition 9. Utility (Industrial use, feed purpose etc) Sugarcane being vegetatively propagated crop can be maintained easily for its varietal purity. However, there is a chance of variation in genetic material of an accepted cultivar due to mechanical mixtures and to some extent bud mutation, which occur in very low frequency (10-7). In practice, variations are not allowed for a certain class of seed eg basic seed cane, nucleus seed and breeder seed. Deterioration caused by growing infected sets of seed cane may also be a cause for loss in germination and vigour resulting in to low yielding capacity and juice quality.

Physical component Physical purity The purity refers to the content of the correct botanical species, inert seed cane setts (setts with damaged buds) and setts with leaves traces. The physical purity is determined in the laboratory for analyzing pure seed cane setts, foreign seed cane setts and inert seed setts.

What is prerequisite for maintaining a variety? For maintenance breeding, the knowledge of the diagnostic characters of a variety is very important. These characters help breeders to identify true to type plants and to eliminate off types or undesirable types. In sugarcane, standard varietal characteristics descriptors like stool habit, stem colour (exposed and unexposed), ivory mark, weather mark, internode shape, internode alignment, pithiness, growth crack (splits),wax, Node swelling, root zone colour, arrangement and number of root eye rows, bud size, shape , bud cushion, bud germ pore position, bud groove, growth ring, leaf width, lamina colour, leaf orientation, leaf sheath colour, leaf sheath waxiness, leaf sheath spines, leaf sheath clasping, dewlap colour , ligular process, shape of auricle should be observed during the different stages of crop growth for selecting desirable types. Quality seed should have the following characteristics:

1. true-to-type genetic purity 2. no admixture in the seed cane setts 3. high germination capacity 4. free from diseases/ insect-pests 5. no broken /damaged seed cane setts

How to maintain a variety? Being asexually propagated crop, maintenance of genetic purity as well as seed health is not difficult as compared to other self and cross pollinated seed crop as long as basic principles of seed cane production and raising of crop are meticulously followed.

(a) Conventional multiplication

95

Conventional approaches of multiplication in sugarcane involve planting of two to three budded setts of cane after moist hot air treatment (carried out at 54 0C for 2.5 hrs) in well-prepared field at under proper agronomic management.

Selection of healthy clone from the field A large number of single clump of desired variety grown in the field are visually observed and the clones are selected on the flowing criterion: (i) Apparently healthy looking plants: The healthy plants are selected on the basis of the symptoms produced by different diseases/insect-pests. For example sugarcane mosaic virus causing leaf mottling and yellowing, red rot shows red symptoms inside stock and mycoplasma also show characteristic symptoms. Unhealthy plants are discarded.

(ii) True to type: The selected plants should be from correct variety for which the progeny row testing is to be done. Hence, identification is made on the basis of above diagnostic characters.

(iii) High yielder: Based on the above two criteria, the clumps are marked either with giving clump number or by putting the tags on each selected plants. At the time of harvesting, this factor is ascertained on seeing the total number of millable cane, cane height and cane top. The poor yielder with yellow top plants should be rejected. After confirmation that the field does not contain unwanted plants in progeny row, all the marked progeny row plants should be harvested separately to start new cycle of multiplication considering the requirement seed. In order to maintain high purity, extreme care should be taken at harvesting and cutting setts.

Conventional procedure for maintenance of a variety

Select approximately 500-800 individual plants representing the true characters of the variety preferably middle part of the from the source population. These selected plants should be numbered, labeled and harvested separately.

Examine once again each harvested plants for cane characteristics and diseases /insect-pests infestation. Discard infected as well as off types, if any

Make single bud setts from each selected plant after moist hot air treatment at 540C coupled with >95 % relative humidity for 2.5 hours. Examine critically these single budded setts for red rot/or top borer infestation and Discard infected setts for

96

progeny evaluation , if any.

Plant setts of each plants in field in progeny row at 90x 90 cm spacing between bud to bud and row to row under proper agronomic management

Evaluate and identify plants of progeny row by diagnostic characters to similar original variety

Discard progenies not conforming to varietal description or susceptible to diseases and pests

Bulk all the plants of selected progenies to get nucleus seed cane

In order to achieve higher cane yield, cane seed production should be undertaken in the most favourable areas where irrigation is guaranteed, and with adequate and balanced use of fertilizers together with integrated nutrient and pest management.

Non conventional multiplication Non-conventional approaches of multiplication in sugarcane involve micro propagation or in vitro shoot multiplication through meristem culture. The only most effective method for complete elimination of the pathogens from sugarcane tissue is application of tissue culture- micro propagation or in vitro Clonal propagation techniques, which employs culture of apical meristem (0.1 to 0.8 mm) of the infected varieties. The apical meristems are free from chromosomal mosaicism and point mutations and thus maintain the genetic purity and integrity of the clone (Sreenivasan & Jalaja 1995). Similarly apical meristems are also free from the pathogen infection. These characteristic features of apical meristem are due diplontic selection operating as powerful filter in elimination of defective cells. The micro propagation is the best technique available for rapid multiplication and for production of disease free quality seed, which also ensures maximum production potential of a variety. Jalaja (2001) reported that one shoot apex can give about 180 000 plants within one year through micro propagation which can cover about 14 ha of nursery area.

97

Future thrust in maintenance breeding It is increasingly important to have genetically pure and good quality seed. Quality cane seed production procedures for conventional varieties are well known for different classes of seed. However, maintenance of seed health of virus infected varieties and transgenics in this crop is still not well defined. Maintenance of seed cane purity is much easier with varieties having no chimeras for distinguishing characters. It has been observed that a single clump in some variety of sugarcane exhibits more than two types of phenotypes for same character(s). Under this situation, new approach of multiplication is required to develop for maintaining the variety. Further numbers of serological methods like enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) are available for virus diagnosis which has been successfully developed in a vegetatively propagated crop like potato but it has not been tested properly in this crop. An effort is needed to develop standard technique to detect viruses for sugarcane also.

References

1. Anonymous (1997). Maintenance breeding in crops. In training manual: Organization and management of seed production and supply. Swalof Weibull, Svalov, Sweden . 2. Chowdhury, R.K. and Lal S.K (2003). Nucleus and breeder seed production manual. National Seed Project (Crops), Indian Agricultural research Institute, New Delhi; 209 p. 3. Glyn James (2004). Sugarcane, Blackwell Science Ltd. Oxford, U.K. 216 p 4. Jalaja, N.C. (2001). A practical manual for the sugarcane micro propagation. A publication from Sugarcane Breeding Institute, Coimbatore. 5. Sreenivasan, T.V. & Jalaja, N.C. (1995) Genetic factors responsible for varietal deterioration in sugarcane. Symposium on Varietal deterioration in sugarcane, IISR, Lucknow 6. Singh, B D (1983) Plant Breeding. Kalyani Publishers New Delhi, 515p. 7. Singh, S and Naik, P S (1993) Rapid seed multiplication . In: K L Chadha and J.S. 8. Grewal (eds), Advances in Horticulture Vol. 7- Potato. Malhotra Publishing House, New Delhi. P 657-765. 9. V.Singh and Singh J (2002) Healthy seed production. Indian Farming.51(11):p 37-43. 10. Sundara, B. 1995 Causes for sugarcane Varietal yield decline and techniques of rejuvenation . Proc. 57 th annual Convention of ASTI, New Delhi. P. 153-167.

98

18

ECONOMIC GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA NOOHI KHAN AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES AMITY UNIVERSITY ,LUCKNOW

Abstract Modern India has had a strong focus on science and technology, realising that it is a key element of economic growth. India is among the topmost countries in the world. In this paper we discuss some of the recent developments in the field of science and technology in India.

Key words: Economic growth, investment, science and technology

Introduction India ranks third among the most attractive investment destinations for technology transactions in the world.$Modern India has had a strong focus on science and technology, realising that it is a key element of economic growth. India is among the topmost countries in the world in the field of scientific research, positioned as one of the top five nations in the field of space exploration. The country has regularly undertaken space missions, including missions to the moon and the famed Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV). Currently@, 27 satellites including 11 that facilitate the communication network to the country are operational, establishing India’s progress in the space technology domain. India is likely to take a leading role in launching satellites for the SAARC nations, generating revenue by offering its space facilities for use to other countries.

Market size India is among the world’s top 10 nations in the number of scientific publications. Position-wise, it is ranked 17th in the number of citations received and 34th in the number of citations per paper across the field of science and technology (among nations publishing 50,000 or more papers). The country is ranked ninth globally in the number of scientific publications and 12th in the number of patents filed. India's analytics industry is expected to touch US$ 16 billion by 2025 from the current US$ 2 billion, as per the National Association of Software and Services Companies (Nasscom). With support from the government, considerable investment and development has incurred in different sectors such as agriculture, healthcare, space research, and nuclear power through scientific research. For instance, India is gradually becoming self-reliant in nuclear technology. Recently, the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project Unit-1 (KKNPP 1) with 1,000 MW capacity was commissioned, while the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project Unit-2 (KKNPP-2) with 1,000 MW capacity is under commissioning.

99

Recent developments Some of the recent developments in the field of science and technology in India are as follows 1. The Indian Space Research Organisation's (ISRO) Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle-C35 (PSLV-C35) has successfully placed eight different satellites in a single rocket mission, including SCATSAT-1 for weather related studies, five foreign satellites and two satellites from Indian academic institutes into orbit. 2. The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) has announced a research and development (R&D) initiative to develop next generation sustainable refrigerant technologies as alternatives to the currently used refrigerant gases like hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), in order to mitigate its impact on the ozone layer and climate. 3. The Indian Space Research Organisation’s (ISRO) geosynchronous satellite launch vehicle-F05 (GSLV) successfully launched India's weather satellite INSAT-3DR into space, which will provide meteorological services and assist search and rescue operations of security agencies including all defence forces, the coast guard, and in shipping industry. 4. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) plans to partner with private firms to jointly build a navigation satellite that it would launch by March 2017, which would allow the space agency to free its resources to focus on research and deep space missions. 5. Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur (IIT-Kharagpur) and National Highways Authority of India (NHAI) have signed a memorandum of understanding (MoU) for research project to develop technology to construct maintenance free highways in India. 6. Intertek Group, a UK-based total quality assurance provider, has launched an Agricultural Technology (Agritech) laboratory in Hyderabad, which will perform high-tech Deoxyribonucleic Acid (DNA) analyses for the agri-biotech, plant seeds breeding, and plant seeds production industries. 7. The Indian Institute of Science (IISc) has discovered a breed of natural cures for cancer in Quercetin, a compound found in fruits and leaves, and plant VernoniaCondensata, which can significantly reduce the tumour size and increase the longevity of life. 8. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) has completed its mission of developing India's independent navigation system by launching Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS - 1G), the seventh and final navigation satellite, which will reduce the country's dependency on US Global Positioning System. 9. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) has signed a memorandum of understanding (MoU) with the Airports Authority of India (AAI), aimed at providing space technology for construction of airports, which will help make flight operations safer and provide optimum utilisation of land. 10. Indian and American delegations have discussed an arrangement for Space Situational Awareness (SSA), a programme for monitoring space environment and track potential hazards and security threats, and have set up a bilateral mechanism for sharing information for tracking movements of satellites, avoiding collisions and identifying potential threats to space and ground assets.

100

11. The Department of Space/ Indian Space Research Organisation (DOS/ISRO) and Kuwait Institute of Scientific Research (KISR) have signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) on cooperation in the field of exploration and use of outer space. 12. The Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bangalore has become the first Indian institution to enter the Top 100 universities ranking in engineering and technology*

Investment Scenario 1. NIDHI (National Initiative for Development and Harnessing Innovations), an umbrella program pioneered by the Department of Science & Technology (DST), has committed Rs 500 crore (US$ 74.56 million) to implement Prime Minister Narendra Modi's Startup India initiative, by providing technological solutions and nurturing ideas and innovations into successful startups. 2. InnoNano Research, a clean water technology company, has raised US$ 18 million from NanoHoldings, a US-based energy and water investment firm, which will be used to set up manufacturing facility.

References: 1. Alexander, Steve. E-Commerce. (2006: from Computers and Information Systems). Encyclopædia Britannica 2008. 2. Desai, Ashok V. (2006). "Information and other Technology Development" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 2), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 269–273. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31351-0. 3. Ketkar, Prafulla (2006). "European Union, Relations with (Science and technology)" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 2), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 48–51. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684- 31351-0 4. Khan, Sultanat Aisha (2006). "Russia, relations with" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 3), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 419–422. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31352-9. 5. Nanda, B. R. (2007). "Nehru, Jawaharlal" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 3), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 222–227. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31352-9. 6. Prabhu, Joseph (2006). "Institutions and Philosophies, Traditional and Modern" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 2), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 23–27. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31351-0 7. Raja, Rajendran (2006). "Nuclear weapons testing and development" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 3), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 253–254. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31352-9. 8. Sankar, U.(2007). The Economics of India's Space Programme, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. ISBN 978-0-19-568345-5. 9. Sharma. Shalendra D.(2006). "Biotechnology Revolution" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 1), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 154–157. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31350-2. 10. Sharma, Shalendra D. (2006). "Globalization" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 2), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 146–149. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31351-0 11. Schwartzberg, Joseph E. (2008). India. Encyclopædia Britannica. 12. Vrat, Prem (2006). "Indian Institutes of Technology" in Encyclopedia of India (vol. 2), edited by Stanley Wolpert. 229–231. Thomson Gale: ISBN 0-684-31351-0 13. Wolpert, Stanley (2008). India. Encyclopædia Britannica.

101

19

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA MONIKA KAMBOJ DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED CHEMISTRY, AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY,LUCKNOW The Indian civilization, one of the oldest civilizations in the world has a strong institution of science and technology. Ancient India was a land of sages and seers as well as a land of scholars and scientists. India was actively contributing to the field of science and technology centuries long before modern laboratories were established up. This article explores the theories and techniques discovered by the ancient Indians that have created and strengthened the fundamentals of modern science and technology in the world. In ancient India there is a large number of evidence to suggest the prevalence of scientific and technological knowledge. Science and technology in ancient and medieval India covered all the major branches of human knowledge and activities, including mathematics, astronomy, physics, chemistry, medical science and surgery, fine arts, mechanical and production technology, civil engineering and architecture, shipbuilding and navigation, sports and games. Ancient India's contribution to science and technology include: 1. Mathematician Aryabhata was the first person to create a symbol for zero, one of the most important inventions of all time and it was through his efforts that mathematical operations like addition and subtraction started using the digit, zero. The concept of zero and its integration into the place-value system also enabled one to write numbers, no matter how large, by using only ten symbols. Arguably, the origins of Calculus lie in India 300 years before Leibnitz and Newton. India gave the resourceful method of articulating all numbers by means of ten symbols – the decimal system. Due to the simplicity of the decimal notation, calculation was much faster and easier. Will Durant, American historian (1885-1981) said that India was the mother of our philosophy of much of our mathematics It is now generally accepted that India is the birth place of several mathematical concepts, including zero, the decimal system, algebra and algorithm, square root and cube root. 2. Ancient India's contributions in the field of astronomy are well known and well documented. The earliest references to astronomy are found in the Rig Veda, which are dated 2000 BC. Ancient Indian astronomy has emerged as an important part of Indian studies and its affect is also seen in several treatises of that period. Apart from this linkage of astronomy with astrology in ancient India, science of astronomy continued to develop independently, and culminated into original findings, like: a. The calculation of occurrences of eclipses b. Determination of Earth's circumference c. Theorizing about the theory of gravitation d. Determining that sun was a star and determination of number of planets under our solar system 3. Physics - Concepts of atom and theory of relativity were explicitly stated by an Indian Philosopher around 600 BC. From ancient times, Indian philosophers believed that except space, all other elements were physically palpable and hence comprised of small and minuscule particles of matter. They believed that the smallest particle which could not be subdivided further was paramanu (can

102

be shortened to parmanu), a Sanskrit word. Paramanu is made of two Sanskrit words, param meaning ultimate or beyond and anu meaning atom. Thus, the term "paramanu" literally means 'beyond atom' and this was a concept at an abstract level which indicated the possibility of splitting atom, which is now the source of atomic energy. Kanada, a 6th century, Indian philosopher was the first person who went deep systematically in such theorization. Another Indian, philosopher PakudhaKatyayana, who was a contemporary of Buddha, also propounded the ideas about the atomic constitution of the material world. All these were based on logic and philosophy and lacked any empirical basis for want of commensurate technology. Similarly, the principle of relativity (not to be confused with Einstein's theory of relativity) was available in an embryonic form in the Indian philosophical concept of ‘sapekshavad’; the literal translation of this Sanskrit word is theory of relativity. These theories have given brilliant imaginative explanations of the physical structure of the world, and in a large measure, agreed with the discoveries of modern physics. 4. In any early civilization, metallurgy has remained an activity central to all civilizations from the Bronze Age and the Iron Age, to all other civilizations that followed. It is believed that the basic idea of smelting reached ancient India from Mesopotamia and the Near East. Coinage dating from the 8th Century B.C. to the 17th Century A.D. Numismatic evidence of the advances made by smelting technology in ancient India. In the 5th century BC, the Greek historian Herodotus has observed that Indian and the Persian army used arrows tipped with iron. Ancient Romans were using armor and cutlery made of Indian iron. By the side of QutubMinar, a World heritage site, in Delhi, stands an Iron Pillar. The pillar is believed to be cast in the Gupta period around circa 500 AD. The pillar is 7.32 meters tall, tapering from a diameter of 40 cm at the base to 30 cm at the top and is estimated to weigh 6 tonnes. It has been standing in the open for last 1500 years, withstanding the wind, heat and weather, but still has not rusted, except very minor natural erosion. This kind of rust proof iron was not possible till iron and steel was discovered few decadesbefore.The advance nature of ancient India's chemical science also finds expression in other fields, like distillation of perfumes and fragment ointments, manufacturing of dyes and chemicals, polishing of mirrors, preparation of pigments and colours. Paintings found on walls of Ajanta and Ellora (both World heritage sites) which look fresh even after 1000 years, also testify to the high level of chemical science achieved in ancient India. 5. Ayurveda as a science of medicine owes its origins in ancient India. Ayurveda constitutes ideas about ailments and diseases, their symptoms, diagnosis and cure, and relies heavily on herbal medicines, including extracts of several plants of medicinal values. Ancient scholars of India like Atreya, and Agnivesa have dealt with principles of Ayurveda as long back as 800 BC. Their works and other developments were consolidated by Charaka who compiled a compendium of Ayurvedic principles and practices in his treatise Charaka-Samahita, which remained like a standard textbook almost for 2000 years and was translated into many languages, including Arabic and Latin. In ancient India, several advances were also made in the field of medical surgery. Specifically these advances included areas like plastic surgery, extraction of cataracts, and even dental surgery. 6. An artist's impression of an operation being performed in ancient India. In spite of the absence of anaesthesia, complex operations were performed. The practice of surgery has been recorded in India around 800 B.C. This need not come as a surprise because surgery (Shastrakarma) is one ofthe eight branches of Ayurveda the ancient Indian system of medicine.

103

7. Yoga is a system of exercise for physical and mental nourishment. The origins of yoga are shrouded in antiquity and mystery. Since Vedic times, thousands of years before, the principles and practice of yoga have crystallized. But, it was only around 200 BC that all the fundamentals of yoga were collected by Patanjali in his treatise, named Yogasutra, that is, Yoga-Aphorisms. Now, in modern times, clinical practices have established that several ailments, including hypertension, clinical depression, amnesia, acidity, can be controlled and managed by yogic practices. The application of yoga in physiotherapy is also gaining recognition.

8. The first iron-cased rockets were developed in the 1780s by Tipu Sultan of Mysore who successfully used these rockets against the larger forces of the British East India Company during the Anglo-Mysore Wars. He crafted long iron tubes, filled them with gunpowder and fastened them to bamboo poles to create the predecessor of the modern rocket. With a range of about 2 km, these rockets were the best in the world at that time and caused as much fear and confusion as damage. Due to them, the British suffered one of their worst ever defeats in India at the hands of Tipu. 9. Mechanical & production technology - Greek historians have testified to smelting of certain metals in India in the 4th century BC. 10. Civil engineering & architecture - The discovery of urban settlements of Mohenjodaro and Harappa indicate existence of civil engineering & architecture, which blossomed to a highly precise science of civil engineering and architecture and found expression in innumerable monuments of ancient India. 11. Shipbuilding & navigation - Sanskrit and Pali texts have several references to maritime activity by ancient Indians. India is a fascinating country with a very long history. Indians invented many things. Their discoveries, especially in mathematics, astronomy, and medicine, have had a profound impact on the rest of the world.Indian Science & Technology has contributed much to the birth of modern science and throws light on different facets of technological advancements.

20

TAPPING SOLAR ENERGY: INDIA MARCHING AHEAD SANGEETA VERMA DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, SHRI J.N.P.G.COLLEGE, LUCKNOW

"Energy" is the key element for existence on earth. Energy consumption of a nation is usually considered as an index of its development. All the developmental activities are directly or indirectly dependent upon energy. Energy is a primary input in almost all industrial operations. In developing countries like India energy consumption always exceeds the generation. The rapid increase in use of non renewable energy resources such as fossil fuel, oil, natural gas has created critical power crisis resulting uncertain future of non renewable energy sector. To fulfil the needs of entire country India needs to purchase electricity from outside the country. India ranks 6th in the world in total energy consumption, the

104

electricity requirement is increasing day by day due to increase in population and industrial growth. In the present scenario many Indians do not have access to electricity and as many as 80,000 villages are yet to be electrified. As per 16th electric power survey, the anticipated demand of an additional 1, 00,000 MW supply. To fulfil this gap and to meet this requirement India has decided to organise a program to develop and utilize its renewable energy resources in a proper way. Solar energy depends on the natural energy produced by the sun to generate electricity. Solar energy is the cleanest and most abundant renewable energy source available. Modern technology can harness this energy for a variety of uses, including generating electricity and heating water for domestic, commercial or industrial use. Solar energy is a flexible energy technology, solar power plants can be built as distributed generation or as a central station, utility scale solar power plant(similar to traditional power plant), can store the energy they produce for use after the sun set. Solar energy is a free source of energy that is sustainable and totally in exhaustible, unlike fossil fuels it does not emit any green house gases when producing electricity. The two types of solar energy are photo voltaic and thermal. Photovoltaic technology directly converts sunlight into electricity. Solar thermal technology harnesses its heat. Both tap sun's energy, locally and in large scale solar farms. Common components used in solar power systems are solar panels also known as photovoltaic modules which consist of a series of solar cells that convert light from the sun into DC electricity.

105

Year-wise Targets (in MW) Category 2015-16 2016-17 2017-18 2018-19 2019-20 2020-21 2021-22 Total Rooftop Solar Project 200 4,800 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 9,000 40,000 Ground Mounted Solar Project 1,800 7,200 10,000 10,000 10,000 9,500 8,500 57,000 Total 2,000 12,000 15,000 16,000 17,000 17,500 17,500 97,000 India has tremendous scope of generating solar energy due to it's geographical location and country is on course to emerge as a solar energy hub. The techno-commercial potential of photo voltaics in India is enormous. Most parts of India have 300-330 sunny days in a year, which is equivalent to over 5000 trillion KWh per year, more than India's total energy consumption per year. Daily solar radiation incident, varies from 4-6KWh per sq. meter of surface area depending on location and time. The India energy portal estimates that if 10% of the land were used for harnessing solar energy, the installed solar capacity would be at 8000 GW or around 50 times the current total installed power capacity in the country. Moving in this direction India has set an exclusive ministry "The Ministry of Non conventional Energy Sources(MNES),for renewable energy development. The Jawaharlal Nehru Solar Mission is an initiative of government of India and state government to promote renewable energy especially solar power. It is a part of National Action Plan on climate change, inaugrated by former Prime Minister Dr. Man Mohan Singh on Jan.11,2010, with a target of 20 GW by 2022( in three phases),which was later increased to 100GW in 2015 Union Budget of India. It is a major contribution involving states, R&D institutions and industries to promote solar energy. Thus it is an important Indian contribution to the global efforts to curb challenges of climate change. Objective of this mission is to establish India as a global leader in solar energy by creating policies which can diffuse fast across the country, abatement of carbon emission and give employment opportunities to both skilled and unskilled persons. The mission had set a target for deployment of solar capacity -first phase up to 2012-2013,second phasefrom 2013to 2017 and third phase from 2017 to 2022. The 1st phase focussed on promoting scale-up in grid connected solar power capacity addition of 1,000MW through the scheme of bundling with thermal power operated through NTPC's Vidyut Vyapar Nigam Ltd(NVVN) for minimizing the financial burden on the Government, and a small component of MW with GBI support through the Indian Renewable Energy Development Agency Ltd.(IREDA). Recognizing the potential of solar energy to contribute to the energy security of the country and encouraged by falling prices of PV, sooner there was rapid increase in solar installation in the country. Of the increased set target of 100GW by 2021-22, 60GW will come through large and medium scale solar power projects and 40GW through Grid connected Solar Rooftops. The ministry has formulated several schemes for achieving 100GW target such as bundling, Generation- Based Incentive(GBI), Viability Gap Funding. Thus first phase focus on capturing of low hanging options in solar thermal on promoting off-grid systems to serve populations without access to commercial energy and modest capacity addition in grid based systems. In second phase, capacity will be ramped up to create conditions for up scaled and competitive solar energy penetration in the country.

In terms of all renewable energy currently, India is ranked 5th in the world with 15,691.4MW grid connected and 367.9MW off-grid renewable energy based power capacity. India is among top 5 destinations worldwide for solar energy development, as per Ernst and Young's renewable energy attractiveness index. With a view to promote solar energy globally, a declaration was signed and

106

exchanged by ministry and ISA(International Solar Alliance) cell and world bank recently. The joint declaration is expected to help in acclerating mobilization of finance for solar energy. ISA is India's 1st international and inter-governmental organisation headquartered in India. It will be dedicated to promotion of solar energy for making solar energy a valuable source of affordable and reliable green and clean energy in 121 member countries.

Indian government has forecast that it will exceed the renewable energy target set in Paris last year by nearly half and three years ahead of schedule. A draft 10 year energy blue print published predicts that 57% of India's total capacity will come from non-fossil fuel sources by2027. India's energy minister, Mr. Piyush Goyal has been appealing to wealthier nations to provide capital to invest in renewable energy projects to help the country to reach and exceed the"Paris climate accord" target agreed in Paris in November 2015. Mr. Goyal has put forward an energy plan that is commercially viable and commercially justified without subsidies, so we have big global corporations and utilities committing to it.

Japan's Soft bank has committed to invest $20(bn) in Indian Solar Energy sector, in conjunction with Taiwanese company Foxconn and Indian business group Bharti Enterprises. In September the largely French state owned Energy Company EDF announced it would invest $2 bn in Indian renewable energy projects, citing the country's enormous projected demand and fantastic potential of its wind and solar radiation.

Kamuthi Solar Power project is a PV power generating station at Kamuthi, 90 Km from Madurai, in Tamil Nadu, India. Project is commissioned by Adani Power, with generating capacity of 648 MW at a single location. It is billed as the World's largest single location solar project. The energy conglomerate Tata announced that it would aim to generate as much as 40% of its energy from renewable sources by 2025. Tim Buckley, Director at the Institute of Energy, Financial Studies, Australia., said India's "absolutely transformational" forecast is also driven by technological advancement that have led to the price of solar energy falling by 80% in past 5 years.

107

In the 2027 forecast, India aims to generate 275 giga watts of total renewable energy, in addition to 72 GW of hydro energy and 15 GW of nuclear energy. Nearly 100 GW would come from other zero emission sources. Due to generally high temperatures in India, crystalline silicon based products are not the most ideal ones. Thin film technologies like amorphous silicon, CIGS and CdTe could be more suitable. Guidelines for solar mission mandated cells and modules for solar PV projects based on crystalline silicon to be manufactured in India, that accounts to over 60% of total system cost. Companies like Simpa and other that built small energy grids that power a few household or village have the potential to reach 73 million unelectrified households in India that still use kerosene as their primary source of electricity- a polluting source of electricity. But such installations will not be India's way to achieve it's renewable targets. Currently small energy grids and solar home systems together produce about 1 GW of electricity-a miniscule part of India's total renewable energy targets.

India is moving at a pace scarcely imagined only 2 years ago. The conducive policies initiated by government of India have helped in bringing about competitive rates in bidding process. Government is also coming up with schemes for providing production incentives to encourage growth in manufacturing of solar cells and solar modules, which will help in domestic manufacturing. The solar capacity has grown from 1023MW in 2011-12 to 6,763MW in 2015-16. India stands among the top six countries in terms of solar capacity, and with the present trend, India may move up in global solar capacity position. At the state level too, many state governments are actively promoting it through supportive policies and

108

regulatory framework. Achievement of 100 GW solar power will lead to abatement of 170.482 million tonnes of CO2 over its lifecycle, with an enhanced target of 1 lac MW up to 1 million jobs will be created. Solar power generation will reduce the need to import coal and gas, improve energy security and energy access thereby leading to foreign reserve savings.

References:

1. Ministry of New and Renewable Energy-Scheme/ document, Mnre.gov.in., Retrieved 2016-09- 14. 2. Jawahar Lal Nehru National Solar Mission-"General Knowledge Today",Gktoday.in., 2015-11-04, Retrieved 2016-09-14. 3. Yojana: A Development Monthly, August 2016. 4. Wikipedia.

21

ADVANCING SCIENCE IN INDIA WITH FUTURE CHALLENGE ARCHANA MAURYA CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT, SHRI J.N.P.G. COLLEGE, LUCKNOW Abstract Science in India still has significant potential for further development. Although scientists from the subcontinent excel on an international level, the huge potential offered by the country's young

109

population is far from being fully leveraged. Yet, India has a long and proud tradition of scientific excellence. As economic development advances and a broader section of society benefits from high- quality education, science in India will be able to fully capitalize on this unique heritage.The new funding policy will advance India’s prowess in a number of strategic industries, such as space, energy, and the life sciences as well as important research areas in physics, materials science, and atmospheric science. Planned missions to Mars and a neutrino observatory will receive financial support under the new framework.But it is also the new policy’s acknowledgement of the role of innovation in targeted technological industries that is contributing to a renewed excitement among India’s scientists. Energy is one of those strategic sectors, and many of India’s scientific leaders are leveraging the government’s interest in it to enhance vital research programs. For example, as materials science plays a central role in developing innovative technologies for the growing energy market, scientists like Arindam Ghosh at IISc are advancing materials research in graphene for solar cells and nanoelectronics.India’s scientists are also working with their counterparts in the United States on a major new Indo-U.S. initiative called the Solar Energy Research Institute for India and the United States (SERIIUS), funded through the U.S.-India Partnership to Advance Clean Energy and administered by IUSSTF. “This is an important project for India,” says IISc’s Chattopadhyay, leader of the Indian team. “India needs every drop of power we can produce.”

Introduction Science in India is on the move in a big way. The government has initiated multibillion dollar investments to kick start research, education, and innovation over the next five years. Though several challenging issues remain for the country, India’s best and brightest expats living in the United States and Europe are being enticed back to ‘Mother India’ with the promise of world-class research infrastructure and solid funding. In early 2013, India’s government announced an ambitious science, technology, and innovation funding protocol: in the next five years, double its investment in science and technology and, by 2020, drive India’s output of scientific publications to be among the top five nations globally. “The government is going to inject $5 billion into science and technology over the next five years,” says C.N.R. Rao, the founder of the Jawaharlal Nehru Centre for Advanced Scientific Research (JNCASR) and chairman of the Science Advisory Council to the Prime Minister. “This doubles the investment to-date from 1% to 2% of GDP.” This increase in funding is aimed at creating jobs, educating technical leaders, and improving the quality of science in this country of 1.2 billion people, he notes. The announcement is just one of a recent number of nationwide initiatives that have been inaugurated as India seeks to improve its global scientific reputation. The creation of new institutions and universities, opportunities for independent leadership training, and efforts to expand translational research and cultivate a culture of technology transfer are just a few of the federal components encouraging young researchers to set up shop in their homeland. In addition, international alliances, between India and organizations in the United States, United Kingdom, and other countries, are also making an impact in bolstering collaboration across borders and building strong scientific capacity within the subcontinent. But despite these outreach and funding programs, there are still some challenges that need to be addressed before scientists in India can stand shoulder to shoulder with their counterparts in the West. Recent infrastructure investment programs have successfully produced new facilities and institutions all over India, but this has created a shortage of scientists and experts to run and manage the new universities and research institutes. Specifically, according to university administrators, India needs an estimated 40,000 qualified scientists to fill positions currently vacant. However, there is insufficient talent within India to take up this slack, which is being compounded by current labor laws that can sometimes make hiring foreign nationals a complex and difficult process.

110

(Autonomous institutions have provisions for hiring foreigners, albeit on a non-permanent basis.) Nonetheless, both theoretical and translational research in India is moving forward with areas such as nanotechnology, energy, and health at the forefront. Expanding Facilities and Infrastructure The Indian Institutes of Technology (IITs) are among India’s most prestigious academic institutions. These autonomous institutes were established in the early 1960s, and the government has since expanded their number from the original five—Kharagpur, Bombay (Mumbai), Madras (Chennai), Kanpur, and Delhi—to a total of 16. This increase reflects the government’s new policies to give students from a wider range of social backgrounds the opportunity to study at India’s top-tier universities. Recent research funding surges have led to the development of high-profile projects including the national nanotechnology network, which includes the approximately $11 million Nanoscale Research Facility (NRF) at IIT Delhi and the $40 million Centre for Nano Science and Engineering (CeNSE) at the prestigious Indian Institute of Science (IISc) in Bangalore. The nanotechnology facilities were established to train experts and provide experimental facilities for scientists across all of India. In fact, India has done much to magnify its infrastructure. According to a January 6, 2013 article in University World News online, in recent years the nation has launched five new Indian institutes of science education and research, eight new IITs, 16 new central universities, 10 new national institutes of technology, six new research and development institutions in biotechnology, and five institutions in other branches including biomimetic materials and solar energy. In an effort to fill the abundance of new positions, the government has established programs to court Indians working abroad back to their home country. The Ramalingaswami Re-entry Fellowship, funded by the Department of Biotechnology (DBT) under the Ministry of Science and Technology (MST), is designed to attract highly skilled researchers working overseas in a variety biotechnology disciplines. Fellows can have a Ph.D., M.D., M.Tech, M.VSc, or equivalent degree, and are given a stipend, grants, and even a housing allowance. The equally competitive Ramanujan Fellowships, supported by the Department of Science and Technology (DST), also aims to lure senior scientists and engineers, both originally from India and elsewhere, to the country. Increasing Career Opportunities With the increases in funding and rapidly expanding institutions, opportunities are becoming more readily available for scientists who want to work in India. “We currently have about 300 vacancies for faculty,” says Shiban K. Koul, deputy director of strategy and planning at IIT Delhi. “Our faculty search committee operates all year round, interviewing candidates overseas, and when necessary, offering positions on the spot—this is unprecedented.” However, the choice of recruits for IITs is limited because India’s labor laws do not allow these institutes to hire foreign nationals for tenured positions, and the salaries are not as competitive as those in the United States and European Union. One challenge that is on the minds of both Indian academics and government representatives is the ability to draw and retain talented postdocs and other early-career scholars into India’s institutions. Some researchers are less than optimistic about finding a solution to attract postdocs to India when higher remuneration packages are available in the West. “I am finding it very difficult to find well-trained postdocs,” confirms Madhusudhan Venkadesan at the National Centre for Biological Sciences (NCBS), Bangalore. Although this situation is not uncommon in India, certain national, international, “and institutional programs may be helping to alleviate this problem,” notes DNA chemist Yamuna Krishnan

111

at NCBS, who is collaborating with scientists in France and Germany with funding from the United Kingdom’s Wellcome Trust. The Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR)-Nehru Science Postdoctoral Research Fellowship is one such program designed to engage younger scientists. This postdoc opportunity seeks to identify promising young researchers with innovative ideas and provide them with training to transition into independent research careers. The DBT Rapid Grant for Young Investigators and the DST Swarnajayanti Fellowships Scheme provide comparable support for younger scholars. And the Wellcome Trust/DBT India Alliance, an £80 million initiative funded equally by the Wellcome Trust and the DBT, provides competitive life sciences and biomedical fellowships for postdocs and other early-career scientists. Furthermore, numerous universities and research centers, such as the NCBS and the Rajiv Gandhi Centre for Biotechnology, also have their own in-house fellowship programs for postdocs. Growing Talent Early The new funding may prove fruitful for innovation, but there is a need for greater access to education for Indians—approximately half of whom are under 25 years old. The government has responded to calls for greater educational opportunities for young people from a wider spectrum of society, and recently the DST launched the Innovation in Science Pursuit for Inspired Research (INSPIRE) program, with the aim of attracting students to science and expects to have funded one million young scholars by 2014. This is just one program that seeks to build research capacity by giving students the opportunity to gain vital research-related skills. This is important in order to sustain global competitiveness among progressive nations like China. China, states Rao, currently produces almost as many journal articles as the United States, and he believes that the country will soon overtake the U.S. He further estimates that China graduates some 20,000 Ph.D.s annually. Says Rao, “How can we compete with this?” Policymakers want India to increase the number of top scientific publications. “To achieve this we need more high-quality submissions, and to achieve that we need more good people,” says Rao. One of the challenges to finding “good people” is that many Indian students prefer to major in engineering rather than science, because of the promise and prestige of lucrative industrial career opportunities. But India’s leaders recognized the need to motivate more youngsters to pursue science careers and hone research skills by forming five Indian Institutes of Science Education and Research (IISERs) in 2007. Here, faculty members have the freedom to pursue interdisciplinary projects while engaging their undergraduates in research. “I watched K. Ganesh [the director of IISER Pune] build IISERs from the ground up,” says Aseem Ansari, a professor of biochemistry at the University of Wisconsin-Madison (UW) in the United States and director of the Khorana Program, a cross-cultural exchange program for Indian and American students. “I believe IISERs are going to do for science (not just Indian science) what IITs did for technology and engineering. The first batch of students graduated recently and the impact of these ‘research-oriented’ students will be felt in the next five to 10 years.” The Khorana Program is an international consortium also designed to enhance research capacity within India and across borders. Jointly supported by UW, DBT, and the Indo-U.S. Science and Technology Forum (IUSSTF), and launched in 2008, the program grants Indian and American students the opportunity to pursue research at universities in each other’s nations.

112

References; 1. Science/ AAAS custom publishing office 2. Nature Materials 8, 361 (2009)

22

NANOTECHNOLOGY: ONE OF THE EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES IN INDIA NEHA JAIN DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, KARAMAT HUSAIN GIRLS P.G.COLLEGE, LUCKNOW, INDIA.

Abstract Nanotechnology is regarded as a revolutionary technology worldwide being simultaneously promising as well as threatening. There has been an increasing interest in nanotechnology as evident from increased interest and policy initiations directed toward this end. Recent years have shown a marked increase in the use of nanoscience in various fields. This paper reviews the emerging advancements of nanotechnology in fields of medicine and also focuses on the challenges to protect human health and providing safe environment.

Introduction Emerging technologies can be defined as science based technologies that are characterized by novelty, recent high growth and potentially broad impacts. [1] Although countries worldwide are drawn towards the ‘windows of opportunity’ that the emerging technologies are promising to open, it has been observed that the responses of countries to emerging technologies and its social embeddings varies. [2] One of the most emerging technologies in the present world is nanotechnology. The word Nano comes from the Greek word for dwarf, usually nanotechnology is defined as the research and development of materials, devices, and systems exhibiting physical, chemical, and biological properties that are different from those found on a larger scale (matter smaller than scale of things like molecules and viruses).[3] The scientists in the field of regenerative medicine and tissue engineering are continually looking for new ways to apply the principles of cell transplantation, material science, and bioengineering to construct biological substitutes that will restore and maintain normal function in diseased and injured tissue. Nanotechnology applied to the field of medicine will bring significant advantage in diagnosis, treatment and prevention of diseases. Growing interest in this field had lead to the development of a new field called nanomedicine.

Applications of nanotechnology in medicine To overcome the challenges offered by the most dreaded diseases such as cancer, diseases involving central nervous system, nanotechnology has proved a boon in making treatment more target specific and minimizing the toxicities. Breakthrough In nanotechnology promises to revolutionize drug manufacturing, drug delivery, and medical diagnostics. Nanotechnology in cure of cancer

113

The delivery of a drug at right time and at the target place where it is needed is essential. These are more required because of the toxic effects of cancer chemotherapy. In last few years drug delivery system have been optimized including micro and the nanosystem as well as polymer conjugation. These drug delivery systems will revolutionize the pharmaceutical and biomedical industries in cancer chemotherapies. [4] Nucleic acid delivery: Lipid bilayer of the cell membrane poses the major barrier for the delivery of nucleic acids such as small interfering RNA or plasmid DNA. Several viral and polymeric nanocapsules, cationic liposomes, and non- viral vectors (lipoplexes, polyplexes, and inorganic nanoparticles) have been developed that can actively cross the lipid membrane and deliver nucleic acids with ease and reduced toxicity in vitro. [5]

Blood Purification In contrast to dialysis, which works on the principle of the size related diffusion of solutes and ultrafilteration of fluid across a semi-permeable membrane, the purification with nanoparticles allows specific targeting of substances. The small size (< 100 nm) and large surface area of functionalized nanomagnets leads to advantageous properties compared to hemoperfusion, which is a clinically used technique for the purification of blood and is based on surface adsorption. These advantages are high loading and accessibility of the binding agents, high selectivity towards the target compound, fast diffusion, small hydrodynamic resistance, and low dosage [6]. However the technology is still in a preclinical phase.

Risk involved in the application of nanotechnology: Due to the very small size of engineered nanomaterials, inhalation exposure can potentially occur to airborne particles composed of nanomaterials covering a size range from a few nanometers to several micrometers in diameter. Nanomaterials may agglomerate into larger particles or longer fiber chains, which may change their properties and may impact their behavior in the indoor and outdoor environments as well as their potential exposure and entry into the human body [7, 8]. They can deposit in the respiratory system and have nanostructure-influenced toxicity due to high surface area, high surface activity, unusual morphology, small diameters, or degradation into smaller particles after deposition. Particles formed from the degradation or comminuting of nanomaterials may also present a potential risk if they exhibit nanostructure-dependent biological activity. Nanoparticles have high deposition efficiencies in the lungs of healthy individuals, and even higher efficiencies in individuals with asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary diseases [9-11].

Skin can be exposed to solid nanoscale particles through either intentional or nonintentional means [12– 14]. The outer skin consists of a 10 µm thick, tough layer of dead keratinized cells (stratum corneum) that is difficult to pass for particles, ionic compounds, and water-soluble compounds. Intentional dermal exposure to nanoscale materials may include the application of lotions, creams, wound dressing, detergents and socks containing silver nanomaterials. Nonintentional exposure could involve dermal contact with anthropomorphic substances generated during nanomaterial manufacture or combustion. It remains unclear whether different types of nanomaterials will penetrate the skin and have toxicological impacts includes skin or other organ cytotoxicity, through accumulation in skin or

114

metabolism to even smaller particles or due to photoactivated nanoparticles. However our knowledge of effects of engineered nanomaterials or nanoparticles on human health and environment is incomplete.

Conclusion The immense potential of nanotechnology promises the significant changes in future. The field of medicine will make a leap forward with the use of nanotechnology. However emphasis has to be laid on the risk related research that is vital for the responsible development of nanotechnology with reaping benefits and minimizing risks . References: 1. Cozzens SE, Gatchair S, Kang J, Kim K-S, et al. ‘Emerging technologies; Quantitative identification and measurement’, Technology Analysis & Strategic Management,2010, Vol.22(pg 361-76) 2. Swierstra T, Rip A., ‘Nano-ethics as NEST-ethics: Patterns of moral argumentation about new and emerging science and technology’. Nanoethics, 2007,Vol.1 (pg 3-20) 3. Freitas RA., Jr. Basic capabilities. Vol. 1. Texas: Landes Bioscience; 1999. Nanomedicine. Available from: http//www.nanomedicine.com [last accessed on 2000 Sep 26] Georgetown. 4. Orive, G., Hernandez, R.M., Gascon, A.R. and Pedraz, J.L. ‘Micro and nano drug delivery systems in cancer therapy’, Cancer Therapy, 2005, Vol.3 (pg.131-138) 5. Hart S L. ‘Multifunctional nanocomplexes for gene transfer and gene therapy’, Cell Biol Toxicol 2010, Vol. 26 (pg 69-81) 6. Herrmann, I.K., Grass, R.N. & Stark, W.J. ‘High-strength metal nanomagnets for diagnostics and medicine: carbon shells allow long term stability and reliable linker chemistry’, Nanomed. 2009, Vol. 4, (pg 787-798) 7. Lee KJ, Nallathamby PD, Browning LM, Osgood CJ, Xu X-HN. ‘In vivo imaging of transport and biocompatibility of single silver nanoparticles in early development of zebrafish embryos’, ACS Nano. 2007, Vol. 1, (pg 133–143) 8. Lam CW, James JT, McCluskey R, Hunter RL. ‘Pulmonary toxicity of single-wall carbon nanotubes in mice 7 and 90 days after intratracheal instillation’, Toxicol. Sci., 2004, Vol.77,( pg 126–134) 9. Anderson PJ, Wilson JD, Hiller FC. ‘Respiratory tract deposition of ultrafine particles in subjects with obstructive or restrictive lung disease’, Chest, 1990, Vol. 97 (pg 1115–1120) 10. Kreyling WG, Semmler-Behnke M, Möller W. ‘Ultrafine particle-lung interactions: Does size matter?’ J. Aerosol Med. 2006,Vol.19, (pg 74–83) 11. Stahlhofen W, Rudolf G, James AC. ‘Intercomparison of experimental regional aerosol deposition data’, J. Aerosol Med, 1989, Vol.2 (pg285–308) 12. Mortensen LJ, Oberdorster G, Pentland AP, DeLouise LA. ‘In vivo skin penetration of quantum dot nanoparticles in the murine model: The effect of UVR’, Nano Lett., 2008, Vol. 8,(pg 2779– 2787) 13. Zhang LW, Monteiro-Riviere NA. ‘Assessment of quantum dot penetration into intact, tape- stripped, abraded and flexed rat skin’, Skin Pharm. Physiol. 2008, Vol.21 (pg166–180)

115

14. Baroli B, Ennas MG, Loffredo F, Isola M, Pinna R, López-Quintela MA.'Penetration of metallic nanoparticles in human full-thickness skin’, J. Invest. Dermatol., 2007,Vol.127, (pg 1701–1712)

23

INNOVATION IN FORAGE RESEARCH

D R MALAVIYA ICAR-INDIAN INSTITUTE OF SUGARCANE RESEARCH, LUCKNOW-226002, INDIA

National Science day is celebrated to mark the discovery of the Raman Effect on 28 February 1930 by the legendry scientist Sir Chandrashekhara Venkata Raman. This year the focussed theme is “Science and Technology for Specially Abled Persons”. The welcome change in the country from calling physically challenged as “viklang” to “divyang” reflects positive thinking regarding this group of human being. People with some disabilities are having extraordinary capacities in some other aspect. It is the responsibility of the society to facilitate and to recognize those abilities of differently-abled persons and make them independent and lead life with self respect. There are several examples where such “divyang” people have shown excellence. The recent example is about the achievements in paralympic sports 2016. In addition to sports, such persons can be integrated with main stream of society by hiring persons with disabilities and enabling them for specific jobs. For example, hearing impaired candidates in Bengaluru were recruited and trained to use their strong sense of smell, vision and taste effectively. This inclusivity commands respect for diversities from other employees within the company. Such hearing and speech impaired can be trained for critical skills for employment in the retail and hospitality sector. The eminent persons who gathered honour for them as well our country include Sudha Chandran (actress and classical dancer); Ravindra Jain (visually impaired and music director); Girish Sharma (lost a leg and is a badminton champion); Shekar Naik (T20 Blind Cricket World Champion with 32 centuries to his name); H Ramakrishnan (polio affected CEO of SS Music television channel); Satendra Singh (acclaimed doctor contracted Polio); H. Boniface Prabhu (wheelchair tennis player); Sai Prasad Vishwanathan (India’s first skydiver); Arunima Sinha (woman amputee to climb Mount Everest) Shubhreet Kaur Ghumman (dancer); Mariyappan Thangavelu, Devendra Jhajharia, Deepa Malik and Varun Bhati (the 2016 Rio de Janeiro paralympic champions). We remember the great words of rastrapita Mahatma Gandhi in this context “Strength does not come from physical capacity. It comes from an indomitable will”.

Science developed with unimaginable pace to the extent that we see today, over last few decades. It is not to undermine the great earlier efforts and achievements. For century’s human being, with inherent nature of curiosity, have invented many basic things. Mere observation on natural phenomenon and reasoning behind it led to outstanding basic science, which mostly remains unchanged even today. This followed the era of formal research with planned objectives, hypothesis and timeline. This too has given large dividends. However, time and again importance of innovative approach of scientific research has been advocated because many a time innovations give practical and cost effective solution to complicated problems. Steve" Jobs of Apple Inc. once said “Innovation distinguishes between a leader

116

and a follower”. Innovations reflect the scientific temperament of any group. Bill Gates also said “I believe in innovation and that the way you get innovation is you fund research and you learn the basic facts”. Bill gates also emphasized that Governments will always play a huge part in solving big problems but they also fund basic research, which is a crucial component of the innovation that improves life for everyone. Agricultural research requires major focus on applied research with support of strategic and basic research because it is further complicated because of diversity for climate, resource and lack of knowledge. Hence, the research outcome has to be easy, eco-friendly and framers’ friendly. The importance of present communication in field of forage research lies in the innovations that led to solve some practical difficulties in forage science. Dr M. S. Swaminathan with his in depth knowledge and insights could find solutions for complex social problems to make green revolution a great success. However, after seeing the drawbacks of the extensive use of water, fertilizer and pesticides, he emphasized for the Evergreen Revolution towards an eco-friendly, resource-poor, sustainable agriculture.

Some of the achievements in the field of forage crop improvement and forage seed technology which are outcome of my efforts for about three decades, along with team members, are presented here under in brief.

Genetic diversity enrichment Forage germplasm enrichment through explorations and collection (in India and abroad) and correspondence. Materials generated through breeding efforts have also been maintained in MTS at IGFRI. Part of it deposited to LTS at NBPGR. Germplasm evaluation, characterization and documentation Approximately 1200 germplasm lines of perennial grasses (Dichanthium- Bothriochloa, Sehima, Heteropogon, Panicum), 250 of Maize, 600 of Trifolium have been evaluated for morphological traits including many for biochemical, nutritive parameters and molecular characterization. All these results have been documented in the form of evaluation catalogues.

Development of novel genetic stocks Panicum Triploid, pentaploid, hexaploid, heptaploid,Octoploid, nonoploid, 11 ploid, maximum cytotypes; Sexual plant Trifolium Diploid Pentafoliate, Tertaploid pentafoliate, Self-incompatible Tetraploid, Self alexandrinum compatible Diploid, Black seed coat, Black seeded Pentafoliate Pennisetum Tetraploid male sterile line, Maintainer of tetra A4 MS line, Trispecific cross GOS, P. glaucum glaucum x P. squamulatum – H1 apomictic & H2 sexual, P.. glaucum x P. orientale – BIII Hybrid with partitioned component of apomixes; P. glaucum x P. orientale - Induced apospory in diploid

Identification of stress tolerant lines through germplasm evaluation in target environment Salt tolerant lines were identified in Dichanthium-Bothriochloa complex, Sehima, Panicum maximum, Heteropogon contortus, Chrysopogon, Berseem and Oat through testing in saline sodic condition at Jhansi, alkaline condition at Faizabad and secondary salanization at Karnal. Similarly, shade tolerant lines were identified in Panicum maximum through evaluation at Jhansi, Pusa and Vellayani.

117

Developing recombinant inbred lines (RIL) and near isogenic line (NIL) RIL population from interspecific crosses (T. alexandrinum x T. apertum, T. alexandrinum x T. resupinatum, T. alexandrinum x T. constantinopolitanum) and intervarietal crosses involving the three ecotypes (Mescavi, Fahl, Saidi) developed. NILpopulation from interspecific cross T. alexandrinum x T. apertum developed for root rot resistance, seed colour (black/yellow) and habit (erect/prostrate).

Varietal development Six varieties in forage crops have been released/ identified. These include three varieties in Berseem (including one tetraploid) and three in guinea grass. The varieties are in heavy demand.

Interspecific hybrids (ISH) developed through embryo rescue Worldwide first report of making following ISH through embryo rescue T. alexandrinum x T. apertum, T. alexandrinum x T. resupinatum, T. alexandrinum x T. constantinopolitanum, T. alexandrinum x T. lappaceum, T. alexandrinum x T. subterraneum, T. alexandrinum x T. echinatum ,T. alexandrinum x T. vesiculosum.

Lentil improvement Interspecific hybrids between Lens culinaris and L. orientalis developed. Additionally L. culiaris subspecies microsperma crossed with yellow cotyledon and plain seed coat macrosperma lentils. Large number of segregating progenies developed with intermediate seed size and yellow cotyledon.

Partitioning of apomixis components in Pennisetum and Panicum Partitioning and recombination of apomixis components (i.e. apomeiosis, parthenogenesis and functional endosperm development) studied in Pennisetum and Panicum. Lines expressing apomixis component were identified utilizing Flow Cytmoetric Seed Screen (FCSS) in germplasm and various crosses. Utilization of recombination of such lines resulted in development of ploidy series in P. maximum - 3x, 4x, 5x, 6x, 7x, 9x developed from single progenitor though Hybridization-supplemented Apomixis-components Partitioning Approach (HAPA).

Grass Seed Production Technologies:  Planting material multiplication in BN Hybrid - In-vitro rooting, High density nursery.  Defluffing of Deenanath seed.  Guinea grass seed production - Hormonal application, In-vitro maturation.  Physiological stage harvesting in Berseem.

References; 1. Science/ AAAS custom publishing office 2. Nature Materials 8, 361 (2009)

118

24

INDIA AS A SOURCE OF KNOWLEDGE FROM PAST TO PRESENT

SAURABH KUMAR SINGH DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, NETAJI SUBHASH CHANDRA GOVERNMENT GIRLS P G COLLEGE, LUCKNOW (INDIA)

Abstract India is not only a source of culture but a source of knowledge too. It has always been a source of scientific and traditional knowledge since time immemorial. Science and Technology have always been an integral part of Indian culture. Natural philosophy, as it was termed in those ancient times, was pursued vigorously at institutions of higher learning. Implementation of traditional technologies should be done in parallel with top down ‘modern' scientific development. Keywords: Traditional knowledge, ecological hazard, peninsular country, research and development

Introduction The history of science and technology in the Indian Subcontinent begins with the Indus Valley Civilization to early states and empires. From the very past till now India has efficiently demonstrated its scientific command on day to day life through traditional knowledge which was having its own implications. Traditional knowledge is the technical, social, organizational and cultural collective memory of human responses to the complexities of life, and is a part of the great human experiment of survival and development1. Many traditional knowledge systems are relevant to economic planning today, because they are eco-friendly, sustainable, labor-intensive, rather than capital intensive1. A few examples of past Indian traditional and scientific knowledge are as follows-

1- There was an ancient Indian system of talabs in every village. They were designed to collect and store rainwater for irrigation and for drinking. 2- This indigenous system scores over modern dams that are centrally managed and possible ecological hazards. 3- In Indians were the first to develop steel, and the famous Delhi Iron Pillar is the world's oldest extant rust-free sample of steel, having lasted 16 centuries. 4- Yoga and Ayurveda have always been famous for many medical systems which are now being revived. There is also a growing interest in Indian systems of mind-management, including forms of yoga and meditation. Implementation of traditional technologies should be done in parallel with top down ‘modern' scientific development.

Present scenario of Indian scientific knowledge India is a land where numerous brilliant brains have made contribution in the field of science and technology and enhanced its position around the globe. India has the second largest group of scientists

119

and engineers in the world. The Indian Renaissance, which coincided with our independence struggle, at the dawn of 1900s witnessed great strides made by Indian scientists. This innate ability to perform creatively in science came to be backed with an institutional setup and strong state support after the country’s independence in 1947. Since then, the Government of India has spared no effort to establish a modern Science and Technology infrastructure in the country. The Department of Science and Technology plays a pivotal role in promotion of science and technology in the country. Vikram Sarabhai who was a physicist is considered to be the father of India's space program2. He played an important role in the creation of both the Indian Space Research Organisation and the Physical Research Laboratory (Ahemadabad). Jawaharlal Nehru initiated reforms to promote higher education, science, and technology in India3. India accounts for about 10% of all expenditure on research and development in Asia. The Indian Institutes of Technology conceived by a 22-member committee of scholars and entrepreneurs in order to promote technical education was inaugurated on 18 August 1951 at Kharagpur4. Recently some achievements have been made regarding space technology. They are the Mars Orbiter Mission, also called Mangalyaan5 was launched on 5 November 2013 by the Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO)6, 7, 8, 9. Chandrayaan-1 is another space project which has detected water ice on the Moon10.

Role of higher education Higher education plays an important role in supporting a nation’s R & D efforts. It provides skilled human resources for the R & D system. It is often the lead player in public research arena. Academic research through universities forms an important component of the technological base of a country. In India higher education has played a very important role in the development of science and technology in India. Higher education institutes such as IITs, IISC Bangalore, JNU and other important universities provide a platform for research work. Government must provide every facility to the young researchers and scientists so that quality research work can be done.

Conclusion The base of development of a nation is its education level. More the education level more will be the research output. India is a developing country, although it preserves a lot of talent and skill in its young minds, it has yet to compete with the developed countries which excel in research and development because of their developmental policies and dedicated effort towards higher education and research work. India too can excel in research and development if policies which are made by the government are more focused towards higher education and research. More teachers should be employed where there is a lack of teachers and adequate facilities should be provided to them so that they can give their maximum output in the research and development activities. If these policies are employed then India can easily compete with other developed countries.

120

Future aspects India is a country peninsular country having unity in diversity with lots of natural resources. i the last few decades it has developed a large number of universities and research centers which are governed by ugc, csir etc. there is a need to put more and more effort towards high quality research work so as to increase the number of research papers in reputed journals. with the recent space explorations, india has achieved a new height in space technology. government should try to introduce short term space research activity at school level so as to create interest among young students in space technology. if such types of research programs in other fields of science also are inducted in future then india will not only compete with the developed nations but will also become a developed country in recent future.

References: 1. History of Indian Science and Technology. 2. Burleson, D. (2008). Space Programs Outside the United States: All Exploration and Research Efforts, Country by Country. McFarland. 136. ISBN 0-7864-1852-4 3. Nanda 2006. 4. Vrat 2006. 5. "Mangalyaan". ISRO. NASA. 2013. Retrieved 27 September 2014. 6. Walton, Zach (15 August 2012). "India Announces Mars Mission One Week After Landing". Web Pro News. Retrieved 8 September 2013. 7. "Manmohan Singh formally announces India's Mars mission". The Hindu. 15 August 2012. Retrieved 31 August 2012. 8. Bal, Hartosh Singh (30 August 2012). "BRICS in Space". New York Times. Retrieved 31 August 2012. 9. Patairiya, Pawan Kumar (23 November 2013). "Why India Is Going to Mars". New York Times. Retrieved 23 November 2013. M3 10. "Character and Spatial Distribution of OH/H2O on the Surface of the Moon Seen by on Chandrayaan-1". Science Mag. 15 September 2009. Retrieved 2

25

ROLE OF CARBON DIOXIDE IN DRUG DISCOVERY RESEARCH

AMIT K. CHATURVEDI1 AND DEVDUTT CHATURVEDI2 DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, J. S. UNIVERSITY, SHIKOHABAD, FIROZABAD, U. P DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, SCHOOL OF PHYSICAL & MATERIAL SCIENCES, M. G. C.UNIVERSITY, MOTIHARI-845401(EAST CHAMPARAN),

Abstract: The production of carbon dioxide around the globe resulting the emergence of global warming day by day. Burning of coal, vehicles fuel, natural gas and nuclear explosions also generates carbon dioxide in

121

the environment, has been the major constituents which majorly influences the global warming. This burden of carbon dioxide in our environment necessitates the need of transforming carbon dioxide into greener valuable products. Also, carbon dioxide has been playing an important role in balancing our environment through photosynthesis in plants. In recent years, carbon dioxide has been employed as a cheap and safe alternative eliminating the use of harmful reagents such as CO and COCl2. Recently, carbon dioxide has frequently been employed as a green reagent in its various conditions and forms for the syntheses of structurally diverse biologically potent scaffolds employing diversity of starting materials, reagents and catalytic systems. In the present talk, I will focus various kinds of drugs/biologically potent molecules generated from carbon dioxide.

Introduction Carbon dioxide is an important green house gas which is drawing attention of the researcher round the globe for the development of sustainable method of chemical synthesis [1]. Due the increasing environment threat it is desirable for the employment of greener, environmental friendly, non- hazardous, safer and cleaner methodologies. The traditional method involves the use of phosgene [2], its derivative [3] and carbon mono oxide [4], but these methods are associated with several drawbacks like toxic, corrosive and expensive. Lot of research is being done in the direction of replacing the traditional method to enhance the reaction conditions and yield of the product. Most importantly it is the desire of environmentalist to introduce the renewable methods to fight against the depleting natural resources. Burning of crude oil, natural gas and coal is the vast majority of carbon source but apart from being economical source of carbon it is also responsible for atmospheric temperature rise and climatic changes [5]. Hence, it is an active goal to utilize this atmospheric CO2 for the active organic synthesis. Carbon dioxide is a useful carbonyl source due to its abundance, availability, nontoxicity and recyclability [6]. Due to its efficiency carbon dioxide is used for the synthesis of value added compounds like carbamates [7], cyclic carbonates [8], polycarbonates [9], ureas [10], oxazolidinones [11] and isocyanates [12]. Compounds synthesized by carbon dioxide are of considerable interest because of their interesting chemistry and wide utility. They have found extensive use in the field of synthetic chemistry, medicinal chemistry, chiral auxiliaries, pharmaceutical agent, agricultural chemicals, alkylating agents, dyes, additives, polymers, paints, lacquers and electrical insulators [13]. Our group has been working for several years for the development of novel methodologies for the synthesis of biologically potent scaffolds employing CO2 [14].

Drug Molecules Synthesized Employing Carbon dioxide In recent years, several workers from the different part of the world have incorporated carbamates in between the active pharmacophores of structurally diverse natural, semisynthetic/synthetic molecules and realized that carbamates play a crucial role in increasing the biological activity of various molecules. Carbamates derivatives of various structurally diverse molecules have emerged as drugs and prodrugs [15]. All these compounds synthesized (Figure 1, 2, 3) employing carbon dioxide in various conditions and forms and displaying potential biological activities for different diseases.

122

O OH O H CHN O OH 3 N O NH O O N O Physostigmine: Anti-alzheimer drug O OH AcO O OH O

O Cl O O R O Taxol analogues: anticancer drugs H3CO N

O N N O HO H Cl S N OCH3 O Maytansine series: Anticancer O N O NH2 Cl O N N O O Capravirine: anti-HIV F NH O N Linezolid: Antibacterial drug O N N N O HO O O2N O N O OH O BnO N O O

O O MeO N O Telithromycin: Antibacterial drug O O Antiobesity compound Cl O NH Et Et O NHCH3 H N R2 Cl O O N O

Carbaryl: Insecticide R1 CNS-Active Antiprogestational

Figure 1: Biologically active drug molecules bearing carbamate linkage.

123

N N O HO O HO OMe R OMe O O O N O HO O O HO O O O O NH R O O O NH O O OMe R O

Erythromycin derivatives

N N R2 HO HN HO N N O OH OH O O O O O O O HO O

O O O NH R O O

O NH R1 O OMe O O O

Azithromycin derivatives

HN S O

O N O N N N O O XAc O COOH F

Carbamate conjugate of cephalosporin with oxazolidinones

Figure 2: Potential antibacterial carbamates of various natural products

124

HO

O CF3 N N HN O N O N NH O O O O O Cl Antioxidant Antimalarial OH O O F O HO O NH R F3C Cl N O H O H F N O H O

Antidiabetic Antiinflammatory

O F COOH

H N S Ph N N O N O N O COOR O

Antitubercular

Figure 3: Biologically potent carbamates of natural/synthetic molecules

References

1. Sakakura T., Choi J. C., and Yasuda H. (2007) Chem. Rev. 107, 2365-2387. 2. (a) Burk R. M., and Roof M. B. (1998) Tetrahedron Lett. 34, 395–399; (b) Choppin A. R., and Rogers J. W. (1998) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 70, 2967–2968; (c) Bertolini G.,Gianfranco P., and Vergani B. (1998) J. Org. Chem. 63, 6031–6032. 3. (a) Matzner M., Kurkjy R. P., and Cotter R. (1965) J. Chem. Rev. 65, 645. (b) Arime T., Tsurumaki. Y., and Mori N. (1993) Chem. Express. 8, 377. 4. (a) Graziani M., Uguagliati P., and Carturan G. J. (1971) Organomet.Chem. 27, 275. (b) Hallgreeen J. E., and Matthews R. O. J. (1979) Organomet. Chem. 175, 135. (c) Fenton D. M., and Steinwald P. J. (1974) J. Org. Chem. 39, 701–704. 5. Liu Q., Wu L., Jackstell R., and Beller M. (2015) Nat. Commun. 6, 1-15.

125

6. (a) Mikkelsen M., Jorgensen M., and Krebs F. C. (2010) Energy Environ. Sci. 3, 43–81. (b) Sakakura T., Choi J.C., and Yasuda, H. (2007) Chem. Rev. 107, 2365–2387. (c) Maeda C., Miyazaki Y., and Ema T. (2014) Catal. Sci. Technol. 4, 1482–1497. 7. (a) Chaturvedi D., Mishra N., and Mishra, V. (2007) Curr. Org. Synth. 4, 308-320; 8. Xiong Y. B., Wang H., Wang R. M., Yan Y. F., Zheng B., and Wang Y. P. (2010) Chem. Commun. 46, 3399. 9. Kember M. R., Buchard A., and Williams C. K. (2011) Chem. Commun. 47, 141. 10. Jiang T., Ma X., Zhou Y., Liang S., Zhang J., and Han B. (2008) Green Chem. 10, 465. 11. Miller A. W., and Nguyen S. T. (2004) Org. Lett. 6, 2301. 12. Yagodkin A., Löschcke K.,Weisell J., and Azhayev A. (2010) Tetrahedron 66, 2210. 13. Liu A. H., Li Y. N., and He L. N. (2012) Pure Appl. Chem. 84, 581–602. 14. Chaturvedi D., Kumar A., Ray S. (2002) Synth. Commun., 32, 2651-2655 ; 15. Chaturvedi D. (2011) Curr. Org. Chem. 15, 1593-1624 16. Chaturvedi D. (2012) Tetrahedron 68, 15-45; (d) Chaturvedi D., Amit K. Chaturvedi A. K., and Mishra V. (2012) Curr. Org. Chem. 16, 1609-1635; 17. Chaturvedi D., and Ray S. (2006) Monatsh. Chem. 137, 201-206; 18. Chaturvedi D., and Ray S. (2006) Monatsh. Chem., 137, 459-463; 19. Chaturvedi D., and Ray S. (2005) Lett. Org. Chem. 2, 742-744; 20. Chaturvedi D., Kumar A., and Ray S. (2003) Tetrahedron Lett. 44, 7637-7639 21. Chaturvedi D., Mishra N., and Mishra V. (2007) Monatsh. Chem. 138, 57-60; 22. Chaturvedi D., Mishra N., and Mishra V. (2008) Synthesis, 3, 355-357 23. Chaturvedi D., Mishra N., and Mishra V. (2008) Monatsh. Chem.139, 267–270; 24. Chaturvedi D., Mishra N., and Mishra V. (2007) Tetrahedron Lett. 48, 5043–5045. 25. Ray S., Pathak S. R., Chaturvedi D. (2005) Drugs of the Future 30, 161-180; 26. Ray S., Chaturvedi D. (2004) Drugs of the Future 29, 343-357.

26

RECENT TRENDS IN CONTROLLING VEHICULAR POLLUTION RICHA MEHROTRA AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW.

Abstract Air pollution is a very rapidly growing problem and a constant challenge for a highly populated country like India. Many researchers have focused their attention on monitoring and controlling vehicular pollution now a days. This paper gives a survey on recent use of technologies in India for monitoring and controlling vehicular pollution. Keywords: Vehicular pollution, Vehicle growth, Micro-controller, GSM module.

126

Introduction Air quality has been a cause of concern all over the world with the concentrations of criteria pollutants exceeding the standards at many places, particularly in developing countries. As in many other Asian countries, motor vehicle activity has been largely concentrated in major cities. The major cities are characterized by a predominance of motorized two- wheeled (M2W) vehicles, which provide affordable mobility to millions with few other attractive options. M2W vehicles have been the most rapidly growing vehicle type in India and represent around two-thirds of motor vehicles nationally. India has one of the largest populations of this vehicle type of any country. The number of vehicles per kilometer of road in Delhi has gone up from 128 to 191 between 2003 and 2009. This, despite the fact that the total available road space has increased from 30,698 lane kilometers in 2003 to 31,373 lane kilometer in 2009. The vehicle population growth in Delhi has sharply increased by an average annual rate 7.40% for private vehicles and 9.15% for commercial vehicles causing severe transportation and environmental problems (GNCTD 2010). It has been found that irrespective of road classes, about 30% of time, vehicles travel below 20 km/h speed. However, Delhi is at the position of the world’s 5th worst city in traffic jam point of view (The Economic Times 2010). According to DSH (2010) report, the year wise vehicles growths are shown below in Figure 1.

Vehicle growth of Delhi.

An emission inventory of main criteria pollutants CO, NOx and PM due to vehicles in the year 2008–09 over the central part of Delhi has been developed as follows: (i) A domain of the study area 26 km × 30 km (~780 km2 area) in central Delhi has been selected. (ii) The numbers of vehicles monitored by Central Road Research Institute (CRRI) at 27 locations on different types of roads in the year 2008–09 has been used. It is noticeable that during the monitoring hours, there were no unusual conditions such as major processions, VIP visits, or other activities, which could induce abnormal traffic characteristics in the selected grids during the survey. (iii) The diurnal variations of vehicular movement are observed at major traffic intersections. (iv) An emission inventory of each type of vehicle with respect to CO, NOx and PM has been made individually.

127

(v) The diurnal variations of emissions during a study of start-up and running modes of different fuelled vehicles have been estimated through IVE model.

Particulate matter (PM) has been recognized as one of the key pollutants with a negative impact on human health, and a range of regulations have been introduced in order to control PM 10 levels in urban areas with an increasing focus on PM 2.5 control. However, in order to design effective programmes and strategies for reduction of PM concentration in the ambient air, it is necessary to have information about the sources and their respective contributions.

The total emissions of CO, NOx and PM from different types of vehicles over the study area of Delhi are found to be approximately 509, 194 and 15 tons/day respectively during the year 2008–09 and are shown in Table 1, which reveals that 2 wheelers (2W) and personal cars (PCs) are the mainly emitting the CO and NOx respectively, while heavy commercial vehicles (HCV) are mainly emitting PM.

Emissions (tons/day) from each type of vehicle

Fleet CO NOx PM 2 W 311.2 5.8 0.40 3 W 14.4 34.5 0.01 PC 173.5 98.2 0.12 Bus 4.5 11.8 0.01 LCV 6.7 3.2 0.60 HCV 3.26 40.2 13.48 Total 509.6 193.7 14.62

It is also observed that the emissions of air pollutants at various locations as ITO, Kashmiri Gate (ISBT), Nizamuddin, Shahzada bagh, Sirifort, Shahdara are in decreasing order. The estimated values of emission of CO, NOx, and PM at ITO are as 15, 6 and 0.5 tons/day respectively.

It is noticeable that the emissions of different criteria pollutants are varying differently into the different operating conditions of vehicles, e.g., CO emissions are found to be higher during idling and decelerating than cruising, the NOx and PM emissions are lower during idling and decelerating than cruising. Therefore, shutting down the engine and restarting it will result in reduced emissions compared to allowing it to idle. Thus, one can say that the longer the shutdown period, the greater the emission benefits.

Technologies Used VVR Kishore in 2014 proposed a self controlled embedded system for monitoring and controlling vehicular pollution. The microcontroller is used to perform four functions. First one is, compare emission values with standard values prescribed by government. Second one is, activates the timer and alerts the buzzer to indicate vehicle will be stopped after sometime due to the violation of standard emission values. Third one is, microcontroller activate the GPS to find location of vehicle and display in terms of latitude and longitude. Fourth one is, GSM module is activated by microcontroller to send GPS values to service centre through text message. The microcontroller performs functions according to the software programmed in EEPROM of microcontroller.

128

Block Diagram

Rajalakshmi in 2015 proposed an embedded controller to interact with the Ethernet shield along with PC/Laptop. The key elements in this system contains embedded system platform which includes Arduino Board with ATmega 328 and GSM modem.

Block Diagram

The pollution control and traffic management system proposed by J.N. Mohite and S.S. Barote in 2015 is low cost, efficient and also reduce CO2 emission through vehicles by reducing stand by time. This system is divided into three parts. 1. On board unit(OBU) 2. Road side unit(RSU) 3. Server side unit(SSU

On board Side Unit

129

Data flow in on board unit is given below

130

Road Side Unit

Server Side Unit

Conclusion

Researchers in India have recently focused their attention on vehicular pollution and have suggested effective ways of monitoring and controlling vehicular pollution. The first concept used in these systems is, detecting pollution level from vehicles and represent to owner of vehicle. The second concept is, avoiding the inconvenience to driver of the vehicle by sending text message to service centre using GSM module. It can be easily deployed in vehicles. In one project, mq -2 gas sensor has been used to detect

131

CO concentrations in air. It can also detect combustible gas which can lead to heavy explosions. This kind of sensors can also be useful in industries.

References 1. J.N.Mohite, S.S.Barote, VEHICLE POLLUTION CONTROL AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT, International Journal of Research in Engineering and Technology, vol. 4, 2015. 2. A.Rajalakshmi, S.Karthick, Dr.S.Valarmathy, Vehicular ollution and Status Monitoring Using RFID, International Journal of Advanced Research in Science, Engineering and Technology, vol. 2, 2015. 3. Pramila Goyal, Dhirendra Mishra and Anikender Kumar, Vehicular emission inventory of criteria pollutants in Delhi, Springer plus, 2013. 4. K. Ravindra, E. Wauters, S.K. Tyagi, S.Mor, R.V. Grieken, Assessment of air quality after the implementation of compressed natural gas as fuel in public transport in Delhi, India. 5. P. Pant, R.M. Harroson, Critical review of receptor modelling for particulate matter: A case study of India, Atmospheric environment 49, 2012. 6. V V R Kishore, Ch. Suman M, A Novel Approach to Implement Self - Controlled Air Pollution Detection in Vehicles using Smoke Sensor, International Journal of Engineering Trends and Technology (IJETT), vol. 16, 2014.

27 URBAN SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT NEED FOR PROTECTION OF HUMAN HEALTH & THE NATURAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIA Suman Lata Verma

Solid waste management is one among the basic essential services provided by municipal authorities in the country to keep urban centres clean. However, it is among the most poorly rendered services in the basket – the systems applied are unscientific, outdated and inefficient, population coverage is low, and the poor are marginalized, waste is littered all over leading to insanitary living conditions. With rapied Urbanization, the situation is be coming critical. The urban population has grown five fold in the last six decades with 285.35 million people living in urban areas as per the 2001 census. The health and environmental consequences of increasing population density, lack of safe drinking water and inadequate urban sanitation are likely to worsen further unless steps are taken to improve the situation. Today the need for a National Action plan with concerned departments working in tandem towards its implementation.

Key Words: Solid Waste Management, Waste Generation, Disposal, Awareness Creation.

132

Introduction: India is facing an ever increasing challenge of providing for the incremental infrastructural needs of a growing urban population. According to the 2011 census, the population of India was 1.21 billion of this 31% live in cities. It is further projected that by 2050 half of India’s population will live in cities. With this increasing population management of solid waste in the country has emerged as a severe problem not only because of the environmental and aesthetic concerns but also because of the sheer quantities generated everyday. According to Central Pollution Control Board 1,27,486 Tons per day of Municipal solid waste was generated in India during 2011-12, with an average waste generation of 0.11Kg/Capita/day, of the total waste generated, approximately 89,334 TPD (70%) of MSW was collected and only 15,881 TPD (12.45%) was processed or treated. Segregation at source, collection, transportation, treatement and scientific disposal of waste was largely insufficient leading to degradation of the environment and poor quality of life. The health and environmental consequences of increasing population density, lack of safe drinking water and inadequate urban sanitation are likely to be further aggravated unless steps are initiated to improve the situation through sectoral coordination and appropriate and innovative technologies for safe management of both urban solid and liquid wastes. Solid waste is a general term used for by products of manufacturing and discarded goods which no longer hold and value to the owner. Physically, it is not only limited to solids but also liquid or gaseous matters in containers. As opposed to gaseous waste which is released to the atmosphere or liquid waste in to the water body, the solid waste is generally disposed of on land and is governed by different laws from gaseous and liquids wastes. Municipal solid waste (MSW) refers to those solid waste whose collection and disposal come under the duty of the municipality or other local civic authorities. The importance of the proper MSW management is one of the prime functions of a local authority, as insanitary management of solid waste is a cause of disearses. Since waste management is the fundamental requirement for public health, the article, in fact, establishes the responsibility of the state to manage waste properly. Each state has Public Health Engineering Department (PHED) which looks after water supply sanitation. However, actual implementation of the services of solid waste management is usually done by the local civic organizations. The state government’s involvement has been mainly financial, because often local bodies are unable to raise their own funds to implement programmes. Three different types of organisations exist at the local level for the implementation of the solid waste management. The first water supply and sewerage Boards (WSSBS) which are set up in Assam, Bihar, Gujarat, Karnataka, Kerala, Maharashtra, Punjab, Uttar Pradesh & Tamil Nadu. The second is separate municipal boards which are set up in Bangalore, Hyderabad & Madras. The large metropolital cities such as Bombay, Delhi & Calcutta have Municipal Corporation which looks after solid waste management as well as other duties. Some larger cities have enacted their own laws to govern the management of solid waste. According to the Scavenging and cleansing section of Bombay Municipal Act, the Municipality must provide proper public receptacles for: (a) Dust, ashes, refuse and rubbish, (b) Trade refuse,

133

(c) Carcass of dead animals and other matter. The owner and occupiers of all premises on the other hand, are required to collect the above items (except c for which a special clause exists which requires an immediate notice) from their premises and deposite them to the public receptacles. It is a responsibility of the municipality to collect from public receptacles at regular and acceptable intervals, dispose them in an acceptable intervals, dispose them in an acceptable manner, and maintain the receptacles in a good order.

Waste Generation: In addition to wastes from households, municipal solid waste can include what is defined by Dr. A. D. Bhide of National Environmental Engineering Research Institute (NEERI) in Nagpur as “Street Waste” which includes: (i) Natural Waste: The dust blown from unused lands, dead and decaying vegetation, seeds originating either from avenues or blown from marginal areas. (ii) Road Traffic Waste: (Those waste that) originate from wear and tear of road surface and that from transport vehicles. In developing countries these include mud, animal excrement (from animal drawn vehicles), as well as petrol, oil and contents of vehicles. (iii) Behavioral Waste: Litter thrown by pedestrians and auto passengers. Significant portion of solid waste collected by municipalities was also found to contain: (d) Street Sweeping: dust, sand, stones, leaves and other dead vegetation; (e) Market Waste: from shops and market areas, including paper, straw and card board packaging, decaying fruits and vegetables and other discarded items; (f) Other solid waste generated from other establishments such as hospitals, schools, office, small cottage industries, etc.

Safe Management Urban solid waste management is an essential municipal service for protection of environment and health of citizens. Therefore the least cost, most appropriate technological option/s for safe management should receive the needed funding individual citizen, industries, hospitals and NGOs should copperate with the Municipal authorities to ensure safe management of urban solid waste. Segregation of inorganic recyclable materials like plastic, glass, metals, papers at the source should be promoted and every effort made to provide collection of these in separate containers or bags in each house. As for as practicable solid waste should be collected and transported from house to house every day. Private agencies / NGOs, ragpickers or their cooperatives may be involved in primary collection of solid waste from households community bins. Pedal tricycle of appropriate design should be promoted for house to house collection. Direct transter of garbage from primary collection carts to the covered transportation. Vehicles, carts would reduce vehicle’s waiting time and make the system cost – effective. Daily collection and transport of waste to disposal site is essential from the vegetable and fruit markets, the refuse could be collected at least twice a day and transported to composting facilities. In larger market complexes, onside treatment and disposal facilities for production of cattle feed or biogas may be developed. Large restaurants/hotels should be encouraged to develop their own onside treatment and disposal facilities (bio digesters / composting / cattle feed production).

134

The vehicles for transporting solid waste from the word level transfer point to the disposal ground should be of appropriate design, suiting the waste characteristics and should have adequate arrangement for hydraulic tipping and quick loading. All garbage transport vehicles should be adequately covered to prevent spillage and air pollution. Disposal: Sanitary land fills would be the major option for disposal of urban solid waste in major metropolitan cities as well as smaller towns. It could be prudent to adopt an incremental approach

Most Preferred

At source Reduction & Waste minimization and sustainable use Reuse (e.g. reuse of carry packaging jars) Recycling Processing inorganic waste to recover commercially valuable materials (e.g. plastic, paper, metal glass, recycling) Composting Processing organic waste to recover compost (e.g. windrow composting, in vessel composting, vermin composting) Waste of Energy Recovering energy before final disposal of waste (e.g. incineration RDF) Land fills Safe disposal of inert residual waste at sanitary land fills.

Least Preferred

Integrated Solid Waste Management Hierachy Progressive upgrading of the land fill sites with improved operational control and Environmental protection measures are introduced with consequent reduction on health and environment hazards. Composting along with land disposal of non-compostables appear to be the next preferential option for solid waste disposal and could take care of upto 20-25 percent of municipal solid waste (organic fraction). Depending on the size and population of the town, compost plants should have appropriate degree of mechanization using aerobic and anaerobic methods. For smaller towns low cost labour intensive wind-row type compost plants with minimum mechanization should be adopted. Urban solid waste from our cities has low calorific value and high moisture content with high percentage of non combustible materials; hence it is generally unsuitable for thermal technologies. However, application of technologies, such as incineration, palletisation, Cofiring, Pyrolysis-gasification should be evaluated through R&D / pilot scale preferably be taken up as joint collaborative effort with

135

private sector / municipal authorities and research institutions with expertise and experience in these areas. Hazardous Waste: Urban Development Authorities / State Pollution Control Boards should create a database identifiying industries producing hazardous solid waste, their locations, the quantity and characteristics of the waste generated by them. Some of the existing National Institutes such as all India Institute of Hygiene and Public Health (Calcutta), IRTC (Lucknow), NEERI (Nagpur) and NIOH (Ahmedabad) need to be strengthened so as to act as regional centres to develop an inventory of chemical industries, a reporting system on toxic and hazardous was to management and documentation of the health and environmental impact of industrial waste management practices.

Resource Recovery: Materials for recycling should be segregated at source. Industries engaged in processing the recyclable wastes like paper, plastics, glass, metals should be given financial assistance to upgarade their technology so that the products are of better quality, cost of production is less and marketability of the product improves. Recycling and waste processing industry should be given some incentive both from the state and Central Governments, such as exemption of plant/machinery from taxes & duties.

Legal & Financial: While creation of public awareness on the need for collection and disposal of urban solid waste in a safe sanitary manner is the key to the sustained successful management of USW, this needs to be supplemented by a legislative frame work Necessary Legal and administrative provisions needs to be made in this regard and financial assistance should be provided from Central / State Governments.

Awareness Creation: The role and responsibility of the people in ensuring a safe and sanitary management of urban solid waste needs to be communicated to the general public, opinion builders, industrialists, hospital personnel and policy makers, planners and civic administrators. Municipal authorities, NGOs and citizen’s organisations could be involved in a multimedia compaign to create awareness on the crucial role of the individual in promoting appropriate solid waste management.

The major thrusts of the recommended policy are: (i) Waste reduction. (ii) Segregation of different types of waste at source at home in the hospital and in the industry. (iii) Resource recovery and recycling so that waste is turned into useful material for use in daily life. (iv) Appropriate technology for safe collection, transportation & disposal of solid waste.

The major components of the National Action Plan of Urban solid waste Management should include: (i) Awareness generation at all level cum-community, industry & hospitals. (ii) Legal enactment to supplement and support the efforts generated. (iii) Research and development for evolving and evaluating appropriate technology for waste management.

136

(iv) Pilot projects preferably in the joint sector for utilisation of proven technological option for urban solid waste management. (v) Strengthening the existing services for urban solid waste management. (vi) Establishment of ray pickers cooperatives in association with NGOs. It is imperative that there is inter sectoral coordination and adequate resource mobilisation both in terms of found and in terms of well trained manpower to carryout the National Action Plan this could be attempted as a Mission Mode Project with different departments developing closely inter linked Mini Mission.

References: 1. Akolkar, A.B. (2005) Status of solid waste management in India, Implementation status of Municipal solid wastes, Management & Handling Rules 2000, Central Pollution Controle Board, New Delhi. 2. Botkin, D.B. and Keller, E.A. (1982) Environmental studies, C.E. Merrill Company. 3. Dassaman, R.D. (1976) ‘Environmental Conservation’, Wiley, New York. 4. Deshbandhu and G. Berberet (1987) ‘Environmental Education for Conservation and Development’ Indian Environmental Society, New Delhi, pp-537. 5. G.K. Singh, K Gupta, S Chaudhary Solid waste Management (J) International Journal of Environmental Science & Development, Volume, 5, issue 4, 2014 pp 347 – 351. 6. Kumar, V.K. (1982) A study in Environmental Pollution Tara Book Agency, Varanasi, 20p pp. 7. MOUD Report (2005) Management of solid waste in Indian cities, Ministary of Urban Development, Government of India, New Delhi. 8. NEERI (1995) Strategy Paper on SWM in India, National Environmental Engineering Research Institutes, Nagpur. 9. Pal B.P. (1981) National Policy on Environment, Deptt. of Environment, Govt. of India, New Delhi, pp-15. 10. Sapru, R.K. (1987) Environment Management in India, Ashish Publishing House pp-288. 11. Singh S & Dubey A. (1989) Environmental Management, Geography Deptt., Allahabad University. 12. S C (1999) Report of the Supreme Court Appointed Committee on Solid Waste Management in class I cities in India, Supreme Court of India, New Delhi.

137

28

LOCAL ANAESTHETICS DRUGS

D.K.AWASTHI1 & GYANENDRA AWASTHI2 1. DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, SRI J.N.P.G.COLLEGE LUCKNOW U.P. 2. DEPARTMENT OF BIOCHEMISTRY, DOLPHIN INSTITUTE DEHRADUN U.K.

Abstract Anaesthetics term is known from Greek words Anaesthesia, its mean insensibility. Local Anaesthetics only affect particular part of body insensitive for pain feeling. These are applied directly to the peripheral nervous tissues which block nerve conduction as well as all sensation in the particular part which is being supplied by the nerves. Chemically they are substituted esters and amides. Some important local Anaesthetics Drugs are Ligocain,Procain,Benzocain,Cinechocaineand Prilocain etc.

Introduction: Anaesthetics term is known from Greek words Anaesthesia, its mean insensibility. Local Anaesthetics only affect particular part of body insensitive for pain feeling. These are applied directly to the peripheral nervous tissues which block nerve conduction as well as all sensation in the particular part which is being supplied by the nerves. Chemically they are substituted esters and amides.

Out Line Synthsis of Some Local Anaesthetics Drugs:

1.

138

2.

139

140

4.

141

142

143

144

In dentistry ligocaine, prilocaine and mepvicaine are commonly used. It is possible to induce regional nerve block anaesthesia by injecting around the nerve trunks or ganglia of the parts to be operated.It is possible to produce spinal anaesthesia by injecting the drug within dual membrane which is surrounding the spinal cord and the nerve coats. Commonly used Spinal anaesthesia are Cinchocaine, amethocaine and Prilocaine.

Conclusion These Local Anaesthetics Drugs are very useful.They do not producenausea or vomiting and are nottoxic to brain, liver, heart and kidney tissues. These also produce analgesia and muscles relaxation and are nonirritating to mucous membrane.

References:-

1.G.R.Chatwal Medicinal chemistry -Himalayan Publishing House.

2.Alka Gupta Medicinal chemistry -Pragati Prakshan

29

SYNTHESIS AND ANTIMICROBIAL ACTIVITY OF SOME PYROZOLIDINE DERIVATIVES S. S. YADAV1, A. TIWARI2, H. N. YADAV2

1DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY. SRGI, DR APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW

2DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS. SRGI, DR APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW

Abstract Pyrazolidine derivatives (3a-d) were synthesized by reaction of the chalcones (1a-d) with Guanidine nitrate (2) in presence of potassium hydroxide in ethanol. These derivatives were screened for their antimicrobial activity against different microorganism. The structures of synthesized compounds were established on the basis of elemental analysis IR, 1HNMR, Mass and 13CNMR spectra.

Key words: Pyrazolidine, Chalcones, pyrazole, pyrimidine, antimicrobial.

Introduction Pyrazolidine derivatives are well established in the literature as important biologically active heterocyclic compounds1-2.These derivatives are the subject of many research studies due to their widespread potential biological activities such as anti - inflammatory , antipyretic, antimicrobial, antiviral, antitumor, anticonvulsant, antihistaminic, antidepressant, insecticides3-6. α ,ß-Unsaturated

145

ketones (Chalcones) display a wide range of pharmacological properties antibacterial, antiviral, anti- inflammatory activities. They are well known inter-mediates for synthesizing various heterocyclic derivatives. In the view of the above-mentioned facts and our continued interest in the synthesis of heterocyclic compounds derived from Chalcones precursors, it was thought of interest to synthesize some new heterocyclic compounds containing pyrazolidine rings and examination of their antimicrobial properties. This characteristic suggested that a pyrazolidine would make a good template for a lead generation library.

Methodology Materials and equipments: Melting points were determined in open capillaries and are uncorrected. Reaction was monitored by thin layer chromatography using silica gel-G as adsorbent using ethyl acetate: benzene (7:3) as effluent and products were detected by iodine vapour. IR spectra ( KBr pellets) were recorded on Perkin-Elmer 1800 (FTIR) spectrometer. 1H NMR spectra (DMSO-d6) were taken on a Bruker DRX spectrometer (300MHz, FT NMR) using TMS as internal standard and chemical shift were expressed in δ. The starting compounds were Prepared according to reported method. Synthesis of 1-(2, 4-dinitrophenyl)-4-(substitutedphenyl)3-methyl-1,2,3,3a,4,5- hexahydropyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidine-6-amine (3a-d): Mixture of compound 1a-d (0.01 mol) and guanidine nitrate (0.01 mol) with KOH (2-3 drops) in ethanol(20ml) the well-stirred mixture was refluxed on oil bath at 70-800C for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was then cooled at room temperatures and poured into crushed ice. The obtained solid was filtered, washed with water and recrystallized from ethanol. The purity of compounds was analyzed by TLC using ethyl acetate: n-hexane (7: 3) as mobile phase.

Synthesis of 1-(2, 4-dinitrophenyl)-4-(4-hydroxyphenyl)3-methyl-1,2,3,3a,4,5-hexahydropyrazolo[3,4- d]pyrimidine-6-amine (3a); MP 252-2540C yield,70 % ,IR(cm-1) 3212 (N-H str.), 1510 (N-H bending),

2850(CH3), 1560(C=C ring skeleton Ar. moiety), 1657(C=N str.),3415 (OH), 1340-1200 (C-NH2 str.). 1 HNMR (400MHz,DMSO6) δ ppm 9.4-7.80(Ar-H), 8.14(1H,s, NH of Pyrazolidine),3.6(CH- pyrazolidine),1.15(CH3), 2.93( s, 1H,CH), 4.87( s, 1H, CH) 8.08-6.83(m, 4H,Ar-H),5.5(NH 13 pyrimidine),6.38(s,2H,NH2),5.9(OH). CNMR131.12-138.3(C-NO2),114.8-126.9 (CH-

Ar),144.7(C)162.7(Cpyrazolidine),188.7(CH-NH2),49.7(CCH3,pyrazolidine),15.9(CH3),51.9(CH), 36.7(CH- + NH, pyrimidine),135.9(C-Ar),130.3-116.0(CH-Ar), 148.4(C-Ar).413[M]˙ C18H19N7O5 Anal. Calcd/Found C:52.29/52.30, H:4.62/4.60, N:23.72/23.70

Synthesis of 1-(2, 4-dinitrophenyl)-4-(4-chlorophenyl)3-methyl-1,2,3,3a,4,5-hexahydropyrazolo[3,4- 0 d]pyrimidine-6-amine (3b) ;Yield 64% , MP 170-172 C, IR(cm-1) 3412 (N-H str.), 2782(CH3),1593(N-H 1 bending),1562(C=C), 1650(C=N str.),748(C-Cl), 1342-1220(C-NH2 str.). HNMR(400MHz,DMSO) δ ppm

9.2-7.7(Ar-H), 8.11 (1H,s, NH of Pyrazolidine),3.4(CH-pyrazolidine),1.18(CH3), 2.64( s, 1H,CH), 13 4.9(CH),8.9-6.3(m,4H,Ar-H),6.2(NHpyrimidine),6,35(s,2H,NH2). CNMR 131.22-138.3(C-NO2), 114.2-

126.4(CH-Ar),144.6(CAr),162.6(Cpyrazolidine),188.2(CH-H2),49.6(CCH3,pyrazolidine),15.9(CH3),51.9(CH), + 36.2(CH-NH,pyrimidine),135.2(C-Ar),130.3-116.0(CH-Ar), 148.9(C-Ar). MS 431[M]˙ MF C18H18ClN7O4 Anal. Calcd/Found C: 50.06/50.05 , H:4.19/4.19 ,N:22.70/22.71

146

Synthesis of 1-(2, 4-dinitrophenyl)-4-(3-nitrophenyl)3-methyl-1,2,3,3a,4,5-hexahydropyrazolo[3,4- d]pyrimidine-6-amine (3c); Yield 77% MP 170-172, IR(cm-1) 3219 (N-H str.), 1612(N-H bending), 1565

(C=C ringskeleton Ar. moiety),2795(CH3), 1644(C=N str.),1382 (NO2), 1345-1215 (C- 1 NH2)str.). HNMR(400MHz,DMSO) δ ppm 9.50-7.8(Ar-H), 8.37(1H,s, NH of Pyrazolidine),3.95(CH- pyrazolidine),1.22(CH3),2.5(s,1H CH),4.72(CH),8.2-6.9(m,4H,Ar-H), 6.1(NH pyrimidine) ,6.30(s,2H,NH2), 13 CNMR 131.33-138.30(C-NO2), 114.80-126.8(CH-Ar),144.1(C-Ar),162.9(Cpyrazolidine),188.5(CH-

NH2),49.4(C CH3,pyrazolidine),15.4(CH3),51.9(CH),36.4(CH-NH,pyrimidine),135.8(C-Ar),130.8-116.0(CH- + Ar), 148.8(C-Ar). MS 442[M]˙ MF C18H18N8O6 . Anal Calcd/Found C:48.87/48.85, H:4.09/4.08, N:25.35/25.33

Synthesis of 1-(2, 4-dinitrophenyl)-4-(4-fluorophenyl)3-methyl-1,2,3,3a,4,5-hexahydropyrazolo[3,4- d]pyrimidine-6-amine (3d) ; Yield 80% MP 175-1780C, IR(cm-1) 1585(N-H bending), 3312(N-H str.), 1 2792(CH3), 1568(C=C), 1644(C=N str.),1184 (F), 1345-1215 (C-NH2 str.). HNMR(400MHz,DMSO) δ ppm

9.8-7.8(Ar-H), 8.5(1H, s,NH of Pyrazolidine),3.54(CH-pyrazolidine),1.10(CH3), 2.43( s, 1H CH), 13 4.66(CH),8.2-6.6(m,4H,Ar-H), 6.4(NH pyrimidine) ,6.40(s,2H,NH2), CNMR 131.54-138.37(C-NO2), 114.8- 126.9(CH-Ar), 144.2(CAr), 162.9 (Cpyrazolidine), 188.6 (CH-

NH2),49.6(CCH3,pyrazolidine),15.7(CH3),51.9(CH),36.6(CH-NH,pyrimidine),135.3(C-Ar),130.2-116.8(CH- + Ar), 148.7(C-Ar). MS 415[M]˙ MF C18H18FN7O4 Anal.Calcd/Found C:52.04/52.05 ,H:4.36/4.35, N:23.62/23.60

NO2

O2N N NH

O CH3

1a-d CH

R Guanidine nitrate KOH O2N 2

NO2

N NH

N

CH3

H2N N H R 3a-d

3a R= 4-OH-C6H4,3b R= 4-Cl-C6H4, 3c R=3-NO2-C6H4, 3d R=4-F-C6H4. Scheme-1 Synthesis of pyrazolidine derivatives

147

Biological evaluation

Evaluation of Antimicrobial Activity:

The in –vitro antimicrobial activity of compounds (3a-d) were determined by agar cup plate method , The results of which are summarized in Table -1 . Table-1 Antibacterial and Antifungal data of compound (3a-d)

Zone of inhibition in mm Compound S.aures E.coli C.albicans A.niger 50 ug 100 ug 50 ug 100ug 50 ug 100 ug 50 ug 100 ug 3a 14 16 13 14 14 16 13 15 3b 18 17 17 19 19 22 16 18 3c 14 17 13 17 22 20 12 14 3d 15 20 12 12 22 23 19 22 Ciprofloxacin 20 24 20 24 - - - - Griseofulvin - - - - 20 24 20 24

Results and discussion Antimicrobial Activity: The in-vitro antimicrobial activity of compounds (3a-d ) were determined by agar plate method .The results of which are summarized in table- 1. The antimicrobial data in table -1 clearly showed that the halogen nitrophenyl, hydroxyphenyl groups is by for the most active substituted phenyl group. The chlorophenyl group generally confers weak antimicrobial activity. Phenyl substitution is weakly active to inactive among the synthesized compounds. Compounds 3b, 3c & 3d showed good activity against S. aureous and E.coli. The compounds 3a & 3b exhibit promising activity against C. albicans and A. niger. However, the compounds were less active in comparison to Ciprofloxacin and Griseofulvin (standard Durgs).

Conclusion In conclusion, the results of this investigation revealed that the observed increase in antimicrobial activities are attributed to the presence of , 4-OH, 4-Cl ,3-NO2 , 4-F in phenyl ring at 4- position of pyrimidine ring of synthesized compounds containing pyrozolidine. it is clear that the comparative evaluation of active compounds will required further studies ; the data reported in this article may be helpful guide for the medicinal chemist who are working in this area.5-Membered N-heterocycles such as pyrazolidine and pyrazole are important structural motifs in an extensive number of biologically active compounds. They are of exceptional interest in the pharmaceutical industry, as they appear in the

148

core structure of several drugs. 6-Membered aromatic rings containing two nitrogen atoms, such as pyrimidines and pyridines possess a broad spectrum of biological activities and are therefore of interest as target compounds in pharmaceutical and medicinal chemistry. In conclusion, the preparation procedure follows in this work for synthesis of new pyrazolidine derivatives via substituted Chalcones offers reduction in the reaction time, operation simplicity, cleaner reaction, easy workup and improved yields. In this work, we have reported different Substituted pyrazolidine derivatives, which were characterized by IR and 1H NMR spectral analysis. Synthesized compounds were screened for their antifungal and antibacterial activity.

Acknowledgement The authors are thankful to the Director, SR Group of Institutions, Lucknow for support and facilities and to the Director, CDRI, Lucknow for allowing to facilities and providing spectral data and analytical data.

References 1. Al-Abdullah E. S., Molecules, 16, 3410(2011) 2. Shah S. H. and Patel P. S., J. Chem. Pharma. Res., 4, 2096(2012) 3. Bouabdallah I., Mbarek L. A., Zyad A., Ramadan A.,Zidane I. and Melhaoui A., Nat. Prod. Res., 20, 1024 (2006) 4. Michon V., Du Penhoat C. H., Tombret F., Gillardin J. M.,Lepagez F. and Berthon L., Eur. J. Med. Chem.147 (1995) 5. Yildirim I., Ozdemir N., Akcamur Y., Dincer M. and Andac O., Acta Cryst. 61, 256(2005) 6. Bailey D. M., Hansen P. E., Hlavac A. G., Baizman E. R.,Pearl J., Defelice A. F. and Feigenson M. E., J. Med. Chem., 28, 256(1985)

149

HEMATOLOGY REFERENCE INTERVALS FOR HEALTHY POPULATION OF DEHRADUN REGION GYANENDRA AWASTHI1 AND ADITYA SWARUP2,3

1. DEPARTMENT OF BIOCHEMISTRY, DOLPHIN INSTITUTE DEHRADUN U.K 2. DEPARTMENT OF PATHOLOGY, DOLPHIN INSTITUTE DEHRADUN U.K. 3. FACULTY OF LIFESCIENCE, SURESH GYAN VIHAR UNIVERSITY,JAIPUR

Abstract Haematological reference ranges are often influenced by individual variables, such as race, age, gender and dietary habits. In addition, ecological factors such as climate and altitude might affect the Parameters, while variations in instrumentation techniques and laboratory personnel involved also contribute to the measurements. Therefore, the currently used reference ranges, which were originally adopted from other countries and mainly refer to European subjects, might be misleading in some cases. This study is an attempt to establish haematological reference ranges for subjects from Dehradun (UK) India. Haematological tests, using an automated haematology analyzer, were carried out on 500 blood samples from healthy donors. The population was found to exhibit higher haemoglobin (HGB) and low platelet (PLT) contents as compared to the standard reference values,. It is expected that the study will facilitate the interpretation and reporting of haematological parameters in Dehradun region.

Introduction In India, the hematology parameters are interpreted as normal or abnormal based on the reference ranges obtained from the international data base1-5. However, a variety of factors could influence these values due to demographic variables including gender, ethnic origin, dietary habits and geographical location6-9. In addition, laboratory methods, instrumentation, personnel involved, and type of container used for specimen collection could be implicated in this regard5,10-13. Thus, indigenous reference values established in consideration of these factors would help to improve the quality of reporting haematological parameters. Attempts to establish more accurate reference ranges for clinical haematological assessments of specific populations were made in several countries14-18. Thus, the aim of present study is to establish a set of standard reference ranges for the haematological assessment of population of different age groups, and offer the recommendation to the local hospitals and community laboratories in Dehradun region.

Materials and methods A prospective cross-sectional study was carried out in Kolkata on 500 individual to establish reference haematological ranges for population of ages between 20 to 59 19. These individuals were from Dehradun region . Di-potassium ethylene diaminetetraacetic acid (K2– EDTA) blood samples were collected from antecubital vein of blood donors representing a healthy population. The donors were selected by conducting a rigorous pre-donation screening through interviews and hemoglobin measurement. Further routine screening was conducted after donation, when the blood was tested for

150

Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)- I and II (4th Generation), hepatitis C virus(HCV),hepatitis B surface antigen (HbsAg), and malaria parasites by enzyme linked immunosorbentassay (ELISA), and the presence of reagin antibody was detected by flocculation method (Venereal Disease Research Laboratory, VDRL). Blood samples were analyzed using automated haematology analyzer (Wipro LAB LIFE) working on Coulter principle 20 for counting of the WBC, RBC and PLT, and cyanmethemoglobin determination of HGB21-22. The blood samples were analyzed soon after collection in order to reduce the storage variables11. The reference range intervals were obtained for HGB, HCT, RBC, WBC, Mean Corpuscular Volume (MCV), Mean Corpuscular Haemoglobin Concentration (MCHC), Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin (MCH), and PLT by calculating the values within 2.5 to 97.5 percentile limit 23. Age group specific variation of haematological parameters was evaluated by one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) for independent samples, and variation was shown by box-and-whisker plots. Statistical difference between the obtained mean and international data1 for each parameter was compared by Chi-square test. Finally, clinical acceptability or bias percentage 24 was checked between the obtained mean of hematological parameters with international data for male subjects1.

Results and discussion The reference range was obtained following standard guidelines 23, showing the 2.5-97.5 percentile intervals and median values for each of the haematological parameters determined for 250 male and 250 female subjects (Table 1 and table 2). Table 1: Overall male (n =250) specific median value and reference interval of the hematological parameters

S.No Parameter Median Reference Interval Current reference range 1. WBC (x 109 /L ) 6.90 4.12-11.30 4.00-11.00 2. RBC (x 1012 /L ) 5.10 4.6-6.7 4.5-6.5 3. HGB (g/dl) 15.5 12-19 11-18 4. HCT (%) 46 36-55 40-54 5. MCV (fL) 85 74-97 75-95 6. MCH (pg) 31 25.0-35.0 26.0-32 7. MCHC (gm/dl) 34 30-38 32-36 8. Platelets (x 109) 163 130-420 150-450

Table 2: Overall female (n =250) specific median value and reference interval of the hematological parameters

S.No Parameter Median Reference Interval Current reference range 1. WBC (x 109 /L ) 6.2 4.01-11.20 4.00-11.00 2. RBC (x 1012 /L ) 4.3 3.9-6.0 3.8-5.8 3. HGB (g/dl) 13.5 11-17 11.5-16.5 4. HCT (%) 39 33-54 37-47 5. MCV (fL) 83 70-99 75-95 6. MCH (pg) 29 26.-34 26.-32 7. MCHC (gm/dl) 33 32-37 32-36 8. Platelets (x 109) 149 130-380 150-450

151

The determination of reference range for haemoglobin, HCT and red cell indices would be crucial for the individuals suffering from iron deficiency and/ or nutritional anaemia, which could be re-confirmed by serum ferritin, Vitamin B12 and folate examination 18. The reference ranges would indicate whether the values for the hematological parameters of an individual differed from the reference population, in case of male and female population, hemoglobin, RBC’S and therefore red cell indices were found to be higher than international reference range and platelets were found to be low as compared to international range. High amount of haemoglobin and RBC’S is because of location of Dehradun at high altitude. However low platelet count can be explained with the current data.

Conclusion: The study would facilitate the interpretation and reporting of haematological parameters in Dehradun region with this established range and would facilitate other regions to establish its ranges.

References: 1. Lewis SM, Brain BJ, Bates I (2006). Dacie and Lewis Practical haematology. 10th ed., Churchill- Livingstone, Elsevier, Philadelphia, pp. 13 – 14 2. Richardson Jones A, Swaim W, et al. (1996). Diurnal change of blood count analytes in normal subjects.American Journal of clinical pathology 106:723-727 3. White A, Nicola’s G, Foster K, et al. (1993). Health Survey for England: office of population census and surveys – Social Survey Division. HMSO, London 4. Handin RI, Lux SE, Stossel TP ( 2003). Blood Principles and practice of Haematology, 2nd Edition, P. 2219, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 5. Kasper DL, Fauci AS, Longo DL, Braunwald E, Hauser SL, Jamson JL (2008). Harrison’s Principles of Internal medicine, 17th Edition, A- 13 -15 6. Armstrong P (1989). Full blood counts in adolescents, Ireland Medical Journal, 82: 68 – 69. 7. Dal Colletto GM, et al(1993). Genetic and environmental effects on blood cells.Acta Genetics Medicine Gemellol (Roma), 42 : 242 – 252 8. Bain BJ (1996). Ethnic and sex differences in the total and differential white blood cell and platelet count.Journal of clinical pathology, 49: 664 – 666 9. Saxena S, Wong EL (1990). Heterogenecity of common haematologic parameters among racial, ethnic and gender subgroups.Arch Pathological Laboratory medicine, 14 : 715 – 719 10. NCCLS (2003). Tubes and additives for venous blood specimen collection. Approved standard, 5th Ed. NCCLS, Wayne PA 11. Van Assendelft OW, Simmons A (1995).Specimen collection, handling, storage and variability. In: Lewis SM, Koepke JA (eds) Haematology Laboratory Management and Practice, p. 109-127. Butterworth Heinemann, Oxford 12. Yang Z-W, Yang S-H, Chen L, et al. (2001). Comparison of blood counts in venous, finger tip and arterial blood and their measurement variation. Clinical and Laboratory Haematology 23: 155-159 13. Daae LNW, Halvorsens, Mathison PM, et al. (1988). A comparison between haematologicalparameters in ‘capillary’ and venous blood from healthy adults. Scandinavian

152

Journal of Clinical and Laboratory Investigation 48: 723-726 14. El-Hazmi MAF, et al (1982). Establishment of normal reference ranges for haematologcal parameters for healthy Saudi Arabs. Tropical Geographical Medicine, 34: 333-339 15. Flegar-Mestric Z, Nazor A, Jagarince N (2000). Haematology profile in healthy urbun population.CollegicumAnthropologicum, 24 (1): 185-196 16. Mangwendeza MP, Mandisodza A, Siziya S (2006). Haematology reference values for healthy elderly blacks residing in Harare, Zimbabwe. Central African Journal of Medicine, 46 (5): 120-123 17. Sahr F, Hazra PK, Grillo TA (1995). WBC in healthy Sierra Leoneans. West African Journal of Medicine, 14 (12): 105-107. 18. Mandisodza A R, Gumbeze G, Mudenge B and Abayomi A (2006). Haematological Reference Renges for Adults in Zimbabwe, Sysmex Journal International Vol. 16 suppl. 1/ No. 2 p. 38 19. Zauber N, Zauber A (1987). Haematologic data of healthy very old people.Journal of American Medical Association, 257: 2181-4 20. Eckhoff R K A Stati (1969 ). Investigation of the Coulter Principle of particle sizing J. Phys. E: Sci. Instrum, p. 973-977. 21. Qureshi HJ. (1999). Comparative study of Sahli’s and chanmethemoglobin methods of haemoglobin estimation.Pakistan J Med Res; 38 (4): 149-50 22. Ward KM, Lehman CA, Leiken AM. (1994). Clinical laboratory Instrumentation and automation: Principles, application and

153

154

ABSTRACT INDEX

S.No. Title Author Name 1. Reduction of Ground Water Ajay Shukla 2. Science, Technology:Development And Challenges In India Seema Joshi 3. Flu Fluoride Toxicity And Its Accumulation In Certain Organs Of The Fish Rajesh Gupta 4. ChannapunctatusIndia Striving For New Heights In Space Science Exploration Asita Kulshreshtha 5. Role Of Organic Trithiocarbonates In Drug Discovery Research Nitin Srivastava 6. Plastic Waste As A Composite Binder In Roadworks:Cost Analysis Approach Divya Srivastava 7. India As A Source Of Knowledge From Past To Present Saurabh Kumar 8. India: Stepping And Striving Both In The Field Of Science & Technology SangeetaSingh Bajpai

9. Water Resources Amit DwivedI 10. Drinking Water Management By Water Quality Index Sarita Chauhan

01

155

REDUCTION OF GROUND WATER AJAY SHUKLA DEPT. OF COMMERCE SRI J.N.(PG)COLLEGE LUCKNOW

Sub surface water and surface water are related to each other through hydrological cycle. Ground water level is going down; therefore it is necessary to save rain water in huge quantity.A Government order was passed on 19th june2003 whether constructed private building on the area of 300 square meter or more to this having water recharge system or not. According to a survey 80 corers liters 0f ground water have been extracting everyday from ground. According hydrological department and Geological Survey of India average 50 cm to 01 meter of ground water is being reduced every day. The capital of U.P. i.e.LUCKNOW, ground water level has reached to maximum lowest level in last 10 years. Ground water level in LUCKNOW was 35 meter in the area of three square kilometer now it has spreaded to 34square kilometer in last 10 years. Most of ground water comes from precipitations that percolate down. The process of precipitation replenishing the ground water supply is known as recharge. The ground water and rivers are the major sources of fresh water and both are passing through under great stress because of overuse .If utilization of ground water is not restricted, drinking water will not be available in future life.

02

SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY: DEVELOPMENT AND CHALLENGES IN INDIA

SEEMA JOSHI DEPARTMENT. OF CHEMISTRY ISABELLA THOBURN COLLEGE, LUCKHNOW

Advancement in the field of science and technology, has bestowed tremendous powers on man. There is explosion of knowledge and information which has helped man in conquering space and time. With the help of science and technologies many mysteries of nature and life has been unraveled and world is ready to face new challenges and move forward in the realm of the unknown and the undiscovered. Since Vedic times, India is known for its distinct tradition of scientific research and technological advancements. Science, technology and development are all proportional to each other. Science and Technology is associated in all means with modernity and it is an essential tool for rapid development. In the post independence era, Prime Minister Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru accelerated India’s development speed by establishing many research laboratories, institutions of higher learning and technical education. .These efforts have shown their positive impact on our economy and development. Role of Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) is appreciable. Through its network of research laboratories and institutions, India is able to join the exclusive club of six advanced nations by developing its 1own super computer at the Centre for Development of Advance Computing (C- CAD) at Pane. The successful launching of Space Launching Vehicle in February 2017 has marked India’s entry into the league of the world’s major space powers. India has shown its ability to fabricate complex systems comparable to anything made anywhere in the world. India’s success on Antarctica proves its wisdom in the field of science and technology. In the field of defense the successful production of missiles, opt-electronic fire control and night-vision devices required for our indigenous tanks is great achievement of science and technology.

156

Our government‘s main objective is to strengthen our economy, industrial development and attain technical competence with self- reliance. Although in the past decades various policies pertaining to science and technology have been implemented aiming to, develop indigenous technology to take nation into the path of rapid growth and prosperity, by efficient absorption and adoption of imported technology and availability of resources. But in spite of all these efforts India is yet a developing country. The challenge before India is to maintain the momentum of its development. Technology which has been used effectively as a tool and instrument of national development has to make its benefits to reach the masses. Thus a great demand from the scientists is to strive hard to take technological developments to people’s doorsteps.

Keywords: Science, Technology, Development, Objectives, Advancements, Success

03 FLUORIDE TOXICITY AND ITS ACCUMULATION IN CERTAIN ORGANS OF THE FISH CHANNAPUNCTATUS RAJESH GUPTA1, KRISHNA GOPAL2, MADHU TRIPATHI3 AND U. D. SHARMA4

1 DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY, SRI JNPG COLLEGE, LUCKNOW 2 INDIAN INSTITUTE OF TOXICOLOGICAL RESEARCH (IITR), MG MARG LUCKNOW. 3 DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF LUCKNOW, LUCKNOW. 4 DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF LUCKNOW India is among the 23 nations around the globe where health problems occur due to the consumption of fluoride contaminated water and the extent of fluridecontamination in water varies from 1.0 to 40.0 mg/L. The occurrence of excess fluoride in aquatic ecosystem is of much concern now-a-days because of its toxicity to its fauna and flora and causing several adverse effects on them.After 90 days of exposure of fluoride at two concentrationsviz. 30 mg/L and 60 mg/L in Channapunctatus.The bio-accumulation of fluoride in different organs ie.operculum, gills, scales, muscles and skeleton. Amongst all these tissue viz operculum, gills, scales, muscles and skeleton the bio-accumulation was noticed highest in gills (3921µg/g) after the exposure of (30 mg/L) for 90 days and was foundminimum in skeleton (120 µg/g) at (60 mg/L) fluoride concentration for the 90 days. The operculum (1130 µg/g) and muscles (910 µg/g) showed moderate accumulation. Where as in scales about (270 µg/g) at low concentration and (870 µg/g) at higher concentration. It has been seen that bioaccumulation of fluoride was found to be higher at lower concentration (30 mg/L) in comparison to higher concentration (60 mg/L) in case of each tissue. Since bio-accumulation of fluoride is concentration and duration dependent and has been noticed that low concentration for longer duration imparts much and faster accumulation of fluoride in the biological tissue.

04

157

INDIA STRIVING FOR NEW HEIGHTS IN SPACE SCIENCE EXPLORATION ASITA KULSHRESHTHA, DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS, AMITY SCHOOL OF APPLIED SCIENCES, AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW.

As we know that science and technology is the key element for the economic growth of a nation, For any successful economy, particularly in today’s quest for knowledge based economies, science, technology and engineering are the basic requisites. Science and Technology is associated in all means with modernity and it is an essential tool for rapid development. India is aggressively working towards establishing itself as a leader in industrialization and technological development. India has had a strong focus on science and technology and is among the topmost countries in field of scientific research. India has become major power in the field of space science exploration. It has achieved a position in top five nation. The country has regularly undertaken space mission, including missions to Moon, Mars and the famed Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle(PSLV). Starting from 1962 when Indian National Committee for space research (INCOSPAR) was formed and works on establishing Thumba Equatorial Rocket Launching Station started India has done tremendous progress in space science exploration. A few of the several milestones achieved are, formation of ISRO in 1969, launching of Bhaskara-I the experimental satellite for Earth observation , first operational Indian Remote sensing satellite(IRS-1), and further launch vehicles, GSLV and PSLVs. India’s first Mars Orbiter Mission (MOM) launched by PSLV-C25 with an experimental satellite GSAT-1 on board.In its mission for launching satellites India has created history very recently by successfully launching 104 satellites in a single mission on Feb 15th,2017 which is now a world record. Except three all the satellites were of other nations In its space mission, India has Aditya-L1 a solar coronagraph mission of ISRO as its first mission to study the Sun. The main objective of Aditya-L1 is to study the solar dynamics in the chromosphere and corona.The orbit around L1 provides continuous solar observations without any eclipse/occultation and is an excellent outpost outside Earth,s magnetic field to make in-situ measurements of incoming charged particles.

05

ROLE OF ORGANIC TRITHIOCARBONATES IN DRUG DISCOVERY RESEARCH NITIN SRIVASTAVA,1 DEVDUTT CHATURVEDI1,2,* ADEPARTMENT OF APPLIED CHEMISTRY, AMITY UNIVERSITY,LUCKNOW BDEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, MAHATMA GHANDHI CENTRAL UNIVERSITY, MOTIHARI CHAMPARAN BIHAR

Organic trithiocarbonates have received much attention due to their numerous industrial, synthetic and medicinal applications. They have been used extensively as pharmaceuticals, agrochemicals, intermediates in organic synthesis, for protection of thiol functionality, in free radical polymerization reactions, as lubricating additives, in material science, in froth flotation for the recovery of minerals from their ores and for their absorption properties of the metals. Moreover, they are useful synthons for

158

the preparation of various compounds such as sulfines, ketenes,thrithiocarbonate-S-oxides, thiols, dithiocarboxylate derivatives, thioacetates, olefins, nitro-1,3-benzodithiole-2-thiones, phosphite ylides and in various C-C bond forming reactions which necessitates their preparation through convenient and safe methodologies.

The classical synthesis of trithiocarbonates involves reaction of thiols with thiophosgene or its derivatives. These methods have several drawbacks such as the use of costly, toxic and corrosive reagents. Alternative routes for their synthesis involve reaction of metal xanthates with epoxides, or episulfides, the reaction of sodium trithiocarbonates with organic dihalides, or epoxides reaction of CS2 with alkyl halides using KOH, reaction of alkyl halides with the hydroxide form of an anion exchange resin, and by S-arylation of potassium carbonotrithiolates with diaryliodonium salts. The application of a phase transfer catalyst has had an enormous impact on the synthesis of this class of compounds30 but the method requires strongly basic conditions. Recently, some of the methods for the synthesis of trithiocarbonates employing CS2 as a cheap and safe alternative. But, majority of these methods suffer from the limitations such as longer reaction times, use of expensive strongly basic reagents, tedious work-up and low yields. Consequently, there is continued interest in developing new and convenient methods for the synthesis of trithiocarbonates under mild reaction conditions.

In recent years, organic trithiocarbonates have been emerged as a novel class of biodynamic agents in exploring various kinds of biological activities. Some of the trithiocarbamate molecules 1-4 synthesized by group of Thomas Beckers has been emerged as a novel class of HDAC inhibitors (Figure 1). O O S S S S R

S S MeO 1 2

O

O Cl R S S S S NH S Cl 4 S 3

Figure 1: Structure of some of the biologically potent trithiocarbonates as HDAC Inhibitors

06

159

PLASTIC WASTE AS A COMPOSITE BINDER IN ROADWORKS: COST ANALYSIS APPROACH DIVYA SRIVASTAVA, CIVIL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW CAMPUS

The paper aims to incorporate plastic waste management into road construction by the means of using plastic as a binder along with bitumen. The paper is to study the existing projects that have been taken up under this methodology and then study them for the benefits. The project then considers the same concept to conceptualise a road in the city of Lucknow using the same material, keeping in mind the IRC specifications and estimating the materials and costs for the improved design. It is then compared with the conventional road construction processes to bring out the benefits of the project.

Keywords: Bitumen, Plastic waste, road construction

07

INDIA AS A SOURCE OF KNOWLEDGE FROM PAST TO PRESENT SAURABH KUMAR SINGH DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY NETAJI SUBHASH CHANDRA GOVERNMENT GIRLS P G COLLEGE, LUCKNOW (INDIA)

India is not only a source of culture but a source of knowledge too. It has always been a source of scientific and traditional knowledge since time immemorial. Science and Technology have always been an integral part of Indian culture. Natural philosophy, as it was termed in those ancient times, was pursued vigorously at institutions of higher learning. Implementation of traditional technologies should be done in parallel with top down ‘modern' scientific development. Keywords: Traditional knowledge, ecological hazard, peninsular country, research and development

08 INDIA: STEPPING AND STRIVING BOTH IN THE FIELD OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY SANGEETA BAJPAI AND MEDHA MISHRA DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, AMITY UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW India is a land where numerous brilliant brains have made their contribution in the field of science & technology and thus enhanced its position round the globe.

160

Higher education, Science, and Technology in India was at first initiated by our first Prime Minister Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru . Technical Education took birth in 1951 when the Indian Institutes of Technology – conceived by a 22-member committee of scholars and entrepreneurs was inaugurated at Kharagpur in West Bengal by the minister of educationMaulana Abul Kalam Azad. Then after in late 1950s and early 1960s more IITs were opened in major cities of India. Indian Space Research Organization popped up in the beginning of 1960s, having close ties with the Soviet Union to rapidly develop the Indian space program and advance nuclear powerin India even after the first nuclear test explosion by India on 18 May 1974 at Pokhran.Our nation has the second largest groups of scientists and engineers in the world. In the context of technological advancements and scientific achievements, Indian scientists have developed various and thus augmented the life of world populate. Since the primordial period, India is projects considered as one of the scientific centers of the world. Thus our country has been significantly progressive for several centuries now and then. Indian scientists have made numerous discoveries in the field of science, warfare, astronomy, medicine, space science, etc.It belongsto the selected group of countries whohave developed indigenous nuclear technology. India is among the few countries that has developed ballistic missiles. In the field of space science, India has the capacity to launch GSLV Satellite. To name few, recently the Mars Orbiter Mission, also called Mangalyaan was launched on 5 November 2013, by the Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO). which was the India's first interplanetary mission[7] and the first Asian nation to reach Mars orbit, and the first nation to do so, on its first attempt.[8-11]On 18 November 2008, the Moon Impact probe was released from Chandrayaan-1 at a height of 100 km (62 miles). On 24 September 2009, Science journal reported that the Chandrayaan-1 had detected water ice on the Moon. In the field of IT and software, Indians are recognized all over the world. Latest news envisages the importance of IT and software. “One of the product security engineers at Flip Kart, recently won a whopping USD 15000 for reporting major security flaws in Facebook, Twitter and many other companies”. Many qualified technocrats are entering into ethical hacking space with an aim to make it as a full-time profession. Today, there is a huge demand for ethical hackers in the market, who can not only safeguard the enterprises from organized cybercrime groups but assist them to assess their cyber security preparedness. While countries such as the USA and UK are far ahead in utilizing ethical hackers in a best way, countries like India is yet to change its perspective about the concept of white hat hackers.

According to Data Security Council of India, the cyber security market is expected to grow to USD 35 billion by 2025. A report by NASSCOM states that the country needs at least one million skilled people by 2020. These figures are clear indication that the country has a huge scarcity of qualified cyber security professionals and the need is going to become severe with cyber criminals increasingly targeting enterprises and government establishments.

No doubt, Scientific research conducted in India by indian citizens have transferred the way the world works from heating and eradicating lethal diseases to understanding the world.

In spite of these credits, India is still considered as developing country. In spite of having best brains with us, we are lacking .We lack when it comes to resources from funds to modern equipment and labs and all these things hinder our growth in the field of science and technology.

161

In my view that before moving further in space science and various other nuclear projects our current mission should be that “ How can we overcome the difficulties on our path of technological advancements with the help of science and technology”

Here Tom Friedman’s Mantra also finds the way: “Think like an Immigrant”can be one the measures to step forward in this field.One has to be paranoid and optimistic. Paranoid, in the sense that we have to be always ready in sizing up the competition, always striving to stay one step ahead, and never, ever resting on our laurels. Optimistic because anything else is self-defeating, and a luxury you can’t afford.

So to conclude, some conventional linear approach which can help in stepping up can

i) Identification of the problem ii) Brainstorming for solutions iii) Identifying criteria for evaluating solutions iv) Evaluation of alternative solutions v) Selection of the best alternative vi) Application of the selected alternatives to the receiver.

To excel in this transformation journey and meet the diverse challenges posed by ‘digital,’ by having different approach, and a little research one can realize that design thinking approach is the way forward.

09

WATER RESOURCES AMIT DWIVEDI SCHOOL OF BIOSCIENCES AND BIOTECHNOLOGY BABASAHEB BHIMRAO AMBEDKAR UNIVERSITY, LUCKNOW.

Water resources are sources of water that are very useful for survival of life. Surprisingly, only 3% of the water available on the earth is fresh water. Major sources of water are surface water, springs, excavated dams, ground water, under river flow, frozen water and desalinated water. Water is one of the most important substances on this panet. Existence and availabality of water is necessarily required for the survival of all plants and animals. If there was no water there would be no life on the earth. Many aspects of daily life as cooking, washing bodies, washing clothes, and recreation such as swimming pools and, keeping plants alive in gardens and parks needs water. Keeping in view the immence importance of water, the conservation of water is also very important to manage the sustainability of natural resources of fresh water. Strategic polices must be developed and implemented to reduce usage of fresh water, enhance water quality, water reuse, minimize hazardous water wastes, expanding water reservoir , rain water harvesting and digging ponds, canal and lakes. Key words: resources, fresh water, desalination, hazards, sustainable manageme

162

DRINKING WATER MANAGEMENT BY WATER QUALITY INDEX

SARITA CHAUHAN DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY, SRI J.N.P.G. COLLEGE LUCKNOW.

India has abundant water resourses but water problem is very serious issue . TShe drinking water problem has become a critical issue in many country especially due to concern that fresh water will be a scare resources in the future. So the water quality monitoring program is necesory for the protection of fresh water supply with sufficient quality and acceptable quality has been emphasized in the millennium Development Goal articulated by the General Assembly of the United nation In India 10 States suffered with water problem Scarcity in 2016 about 32 crores of population does not have access to drinking water . Scientist are working in this field for more than 60 years and they have concluded that water problem is a man made problem in India and not the fault of nature . India get an annual rainfall of 1150 mm as compared to the world average 1840 mm and about 400 mm in Israel is managing, The water successful when as in cherrapunji in India when the rainfall is about 11000mm availability is a problem for 2-3 months before the commencement of monsoon every year there we need to have some excercises which can monitor the quality of water and make water available for drinking . The water quality Index (WOI) has been considered as one centeria for drinking Water classification, based on of the use of standerd parameters for water characterization . The Index is numeric expression used to transform large Quantities of water characterization date into a single number, which represent the water quality level. The WOI and classification Proposed by Department of Environment Malasia, has been used to assess the the quality of major water supply sourses indicating the level of pollution . A commonly used water quality index was developed .The national sanitation Foundation (NSE) In 1970. The national sanitation Foundation water quality Index was developed to provide a standardized method for comparing the water quality of various water sources based upon nine water quality parameter i.e. temperature, PH, dissolved oxygen, turbidity, fecal colifom, biochemical, oxygen demand, total phosphates , nitrates total solids. The water quality range have been defined as excellent, good, medium, bad and very bad . The WOI can be calculated with less than nine parameter as well employing available test results for determination of WOI .The India ranges from 0 to 100 when a 100 represent an excellent water quality condition thus water quality index is a very good tool for classifying water quality. This index is easier for every one to understand and it is based on Scientific criteria for water Quality.

163

EFFECT OF EXPOSURE TO GASOLINE ON PLASMA ANTIOXIDANTS IN PETROL PUMP WORKERS

GYANENDRA AWASTHI1 DEEPALI JOSHI2 AND T K MANDAL3 1: DEPARTMENT OF BIOCHEMISTRY, DIBNS, DEHRADUN 2: RESEARCH SCHOLAR, ICFAI UNIVERSITY, 3: FACULTY, ICFAI UNIVERSITY, DEHRADUN

Abstract: Several studies have reported toxicological implications of inhalational exposure to petrol fumes in animal models; however, there is little or no documentation on the probable effect of exposure in human subjects. This study investigated the relationship between exposure to petrol fumes and plasma antioxidants in petrol pump attendants .The attendants were grouped with years of experience. Vitamin E and vitamin c decreased significantly with increase in years of experience. There were no significant (p>0.05) changes between albumin and total protein among different groups.

Introduction Gasoline vapour is not safe when inhaled even for a brief period of time (seconds). Vapour concentrations, expressed in parts per million (ppm) or mass of total hydrocarbons per unit volume (mg/m3) of air above open barrel in unventilated out-house on ‘hot’ day is 25,000, air around tanker during bulk-loading is between 50 and 320 while air around petrol pump in service station during fuelling of vehicles is between 20 and 200 ppm 1,2 . Both diesel and gasoline engine exhausts are known to contain, in either the particulate or the vapour phase, a variety of mutagenic and carcinogenic agents 3.Ueng et al. (1998) reported that exposure of rats to motorcycle exhaust and organic extracts of the exhaust particulate caused a dose- and time-dependent increase in cytochrome P450 dependent monoxygenases and glutathione-S-transferase in the liver, kidney and lung microsomes.4 Since petrol contains some of these constituents, chronic or frequent exposure to their fumes may affect the oxidant/pro-oxidant balance in exposed individuals. Data on the potential deleterious effect of exposure on oxidative damage and antioxidant systems are still very scanty. So far, the biochemical mechanisms involved in xenobiotic biotransformation in petrol exposed individuals have not been clearly elucidated .In this present study, therefore, we assessed the levels of biomarkers of oxidative stress in petrol attendants in Dehradun region.

Subjects and study design: The study comprised of a total 86 patients subjects (aged between 21 and 37 years with a median of 24 years) were taken for these study .Only those individuals who had not been on antioxidant supplements or had conditions (such as diabetes, asthma, hypertension, malaria) with underlying inflammatory or immune responses and the use of drugs which interfere with oxidative metabolism were recruited. Participants gave informed written consent in accordance with Helsinki Declaration of 1964 as amended in 1983 (World Medical Organization, 1996). Ten (10) ml of blood sample were collected from the ante-cubital vein of subjects for analysis. The level of vitamin E was determined in the plasma level by using the method of Baker (1968) which is based on the principle that

164

vitamin E extracted in xylene is made to react with alpha, alpha-dipyridyl. The product produces a reddish color with ferric chloride, which was read at 520 nm while vitamin C was determined colorimetrically according to the method of Omaye et al. (1979) in which vitamin C reacts with acidic 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine to form a red bis-hydrazone which was measured at 520 nm. Albumin and total protein were determined by BCG and Biuret method respectively.

Statistical analysis: Results are presented as mean ± standard deviation (S.D.). Data were analyzed using Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS) version 16.0. Comparison between Petrol attendants and control was performed using Student’s t-test for unpaired data. The statistical significance was set at p<0.05.

Results: The blood samples of total 86 petroleum attendants were taken 33 petroleum attendants were having work experience between ( No. OF Petrol Pump 01-05) years ,40 attendants were WORKERS having work experience between (06-10) years and 13 attendants were having the work experience of more than 10 years. None of the 1 – 5 workers were overweighed or obese. 6 – 10 All they are non diabetic and there TSH levels were normal. And none of 11 – 15 them is hypersensitive.

Table 1: Plasma proteins and antioxidant vitamins

Character Experience of Groups (yrs) Level of Significance

Groups 1 – 5 6 – 10 11 – 15

Mean Albumin (gm/dl) 4.28 4.19 4.145 NS

Mean Proteins (gm/dl) 6.86 7.04 6.94 NS Mean (A/G ratio) 1.574 1.516 1.48 NS

Vitamin c (mg/dl) 14.8 13.5 10.2 *

Vitamin E (mg/dl) 0.58 0.49 0.30 *

165

Table 1 shows variation of plasma proteins and antioxidant vitamins of petrol attendants with years of experience. . Vitamin E and vitamin c decreased significantly with increase in years of experience. There were no significant (p>0.05) changes between albumin and total protein among different groups.

Discussion: Several studies have reported toxicological implications of inhalational exposure to petrol fumes in human and animal models5,6,7,8 (Smith et al., 1993; Pranjic et al., 2002; Lewne et al., 2006; Azeez et al., 2012). Xenobiotics within the organism undergo a series of reactions and biotransformation to facilitate their excretion. Oxyradicals are continually produced in eukaryotes as unwanted byproducts of normal oxidative metabolism and their production can be increased by conditions such as hypoxia/hyperoxia, redox cycling xenobiotics like metals, quinones, nitroaromatic compounds and induction of enzymes, such as cytochrome P450 and P450 reductase9 (Premereur et al., 1986). Consequently, aerobic organisms have developed defence systems against oxidative damage10 (Di Giulio et al., 1989), consisting of antioxidant scavengers (glutathione, vitamin C, vitamin E, carotenoid pigments) and specific antioxidant enzymes: catalase, superoxide dismutase and glutathione peroxidase. These enzymes participate in the removal of reactive oxygen species. Vitamin E is a powerful chain-breaking antioxidant, primarily preventing lipid peroxidation by breaking the chain of events leading to the formation of hydroperoxides. This action should also lead to a reduction in DNA damage since the intermediate products of lipid peroxidation include lipid peroxides, which can cause strand breaks in DNA11 (Cheeseman, 1993). Significant decrease of vitamin E and vitamin was observed in different groups with increase in number of years of experience may be attributable to its role in preventing lipid peroxidation which may cause its depletion. Albumin, total protein and A/G ratio level in different groups did not change significantly . Our results agreed with the study of Akinosun et al. (2006)12. Albumin transports free fatty acids in the plasma and possesses cysteine residue which enhances its capacity to neutralize peroxyl radicals 13 (Young and Woodside, 2001). Data from this study seem to suggest that oxidative stress is associated with occupational exposure to petrol fume in these individuals. Petroleum attendants therefore should take necessary precautionary measures and have regular medical check-up to ascertain their health condition.

References

1. Micyus, N.J., J.D. McCurry and J.V. Seeley, 2005. Analysis of aromatic compounds in gasoline withflow-switching comprehensive two-dimensional gas chromatography. J. Chromatogr., 1086: 115-121. 2. Lewne, M., G. Nise, M.L. Lind and P. Gustavsson, 2006. Exposure to particles and nitrogen dioxide among taxi, bus lorry drivers. Int. Arch. Occ. Env. Hea., 79: 220-226. 3. Yamamoto, T. and C.B. Wilson, 1987. Binding of anti-basement membrane antibody to alveolar basement membrane after intratracheal gasoline instillation in rabbits. Am. J. Pathol., 126: 497- 505. 4. Ueng, T.H., W.P. Hwang, R.M. Chen, H.W. Wang, M.L. Kuo, S.S. Park and F.P. Guengerich, 1998.

166

Effects of motocycle exhaust on cytochrome P-450 dependent monooxygenases and glutathione S-Transferase in rat tissues. J. Toxicol. Environ. Health, 54: 509-527. 5. Smith, T.J., S.K. Hammand and O. Wond, 1993. Health effects of gasoline exposure, 1: Exposure assessment for US, distributions workers. Environ. Health Persp., 101: 13-21. 6. Pranjic, N., H. Mujagic, M. Nurkic, J. Karamehic and S. Pavlovic, 2002. Assessment of health effects inworkers at gasoline station. Bosn. J. Basic Med. Sci., 2: 35-45. 7. Lewne, M., G. Nise, M.L. Lind and P. Gustavsson, 2006. Exposure to particles and nitrogen dioxide among taxi, bus lorry drivers. Int. Arch. Occ. Env. Hea., 79: 220-226. 8. Azeez, O.M., R.E. Akhigbe and C.N. Anigbogu, 2012. Exposure to petroleum hydrocarbon: Implications in lung lipid peroxidation and antioxidant defense system in rat. Toxicol. Int., 19: 306-309. 9. Premereur, N., C. van den Branden and F. Roels, 1986. Cytochrome P-45O-dependent H202 production demonstrated in vivo. Influence of phenobarbital and allylisopropylacetamide. FEBS Lett., 199: 19-22. 10. Di Giulio, R.T., P.C. Washburn, R.J. Wennlng, G.W. Winston and C.S. Jewel, 1989. Biochemical responses in aquatic animals: A review of determinants of oxidative stress. Environ. Toxicol. Chem., 8: 1103-1123. 11. Cheeseman, K.H., 1993. Lipid Peroxidation and Cancer. In: Halliwell, B. and O.I. Aruoma (Eds.), DNA and Free Radicals. Ellis Horwood Ltd., West Sussex, pp: 211-228. 12. Akinosun, O.M., O.G. Arinola and L.S. Salimonu, 2006. Immunoglobulin and liver function tests in Nigerian. Indian J. Occ. Environ. Med., 10(2): 58-61. 13. Young, I.S. and J.V. Woodside, 2001. Antioxidants in health and disease. J. Clin. Pathol., 54: 176- 186.

167

168